JP7180181B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, have a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities in a jackpot lottery.

JP-A-2000-024234

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information (non-set value ) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
with
The display control means (51) controls the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information,
The predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4; The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The perspective view of a croon apparatus. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6; A 7-segment display unit displays specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retaining part, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball opening of the crew device, and a non-set value. The figure for demonstrating a regulation period. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are cross-sectional views along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of number display on the 7-segment display, and FIG. 11(C). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of alphabet display on a 7-segment display; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section of the performance information display device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 21; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of a set value changing process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35; FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 shows an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 40; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a control example of the segment display section and an update example of the 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a 7-segment display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; FIG. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending production of a jackpot game. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggesting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display section control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of a sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the pattern display part in a standby state. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64; FIG. The figure which shows the lighting/lighting-out example in a lamp display part. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in a sound lamp control device; It is a figure which shows the example of a screen transition in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen by the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, first to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the button is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is executed in response to the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the variable game performance executed in the variable game in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is indicated to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect etc.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the variable game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect of outputting audio. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31 , the game ball shooting mechanism 32 and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. , a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crew device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. be done.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. And on the back side of the game board 31, corresponding to each of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected. Entering ball sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and are detected by an out ball sensor 318a, which will be described later. (see FIG. 12). Also, the variable prize winning port 316 is provided in the right central portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. A game ball that has passed through the through portion 316b of the variable winning port 316 is guided to the crew device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317. FIG. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 317 is detected, the second winning hole is opened. A normal winning lottery is executed as to whether or not 315 is to be opened.

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 318a A detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331 . The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a. Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 .

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) detects that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, which will be described later. A special out-ball detection command shown in FIG. As a result, the sound ramp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the outgoing ball sensor 318a, and the special outgoing ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

In addition, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electrical role) 315b for switching presence/absence of restriction on entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 . The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. In the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . On the game board 31, opening the opening/closing door 319 enables game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and closing the opening/closing door 319 restricts entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening 316. be. The open/close door 319 is moved to a position to open the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise waits at a position to close the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting portions 319d for rotatably mounting the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. . As a result, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling from the left and right of the base 319a. Also, the pair of guides 319 c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319 a to the variable winning opening 316 . A pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. In addition, the variable prize winning port 316 has a through portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The through portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The guideway 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the crew device 37 through the through portion 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entering sensor 316a is provided in the guideway 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the guideway 316c. The ball entering sensor 316 a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 . As a result, the detection result of the entering ball sensor 316 a is input to the main control unit 331 , and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316 .

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the variable winning port 316 is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes the 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and the 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, the round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or the game balls of the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more wins in the variable winning opening 316 is performed five times. It is a game state including the opening and closing execution mode that is performed. The 16R variable jackpot game state is a game state including an opening and closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, and more than in the 5R jackpot game state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the variable display effect of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry of the ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315. , and various image effects such as a variable game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the variable display effect of decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is achieved by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction. done. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Also, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 kinds of decorative patterns, ie, "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, after a predetermined variable display time has passed since the start of the symbol variable display in the symbol display section 341, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped. be done. More specifically, in the variable display of decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns are changed along a preset variable direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuation of a plurality of decorative patterns is stopped in order. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the decorative design on all lines is stopped, the variable display of the decorative design is finished.

When the variable display of the ornamental symbols in the symbol display portion 341 is completed, the symbol display portion 341 displays a state in which the ornamental symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decoration pattern indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are lined up on the effective line is displayed, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit", the pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation big hit among the decorative patterns, is lined up on the effective line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination such as "333", for example, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot among the decorative patterns, is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Or, a state is displayed in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variable jackpots or 5R probability variable jackpots such as "777" and "333" are lined up on the activated line. Also, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns indicating a variable jackpot, such as "222" and "444", are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot. A combination of the same decorative patterns of , lined up on the active line is displayed. Also, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variable display of decorative symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. In addition, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state is displayed in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the decorative pattern combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line, the 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestive effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the decorative pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4, the crew device 37 directs the game ball entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball hole 378 or a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later. It is a distribution. Here, FIG. 6 is a view showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the cloon device 37 and the game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the cloon device 37, and FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371 . The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that slopes downward to the left and is provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball mouth 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 . A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38 . The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

It should be noted that the first guide member 375 can also have a function of retaining the game ball 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 . By the way, in the present embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value that is a game set value other than a set value that is a game set value that is set in the gaming machine 10 is set for a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). It is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is seven (excluding the dot points DP), one non-set value can be reliably specified with seven pieces of information. In addition, since the game set values are in six stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, so all the non-set values can be specified with 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (the prescribed number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained during a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention portion 38 to retain the game balls 99 in a predetermined number or more. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 the function of accumulating the game balls 99, the number of the game balls 99 that is difficult to store only with the game ball retention portion 38 is retained using the first guide member 375. be able to. As a result, it is possible to allow game balls 99 of a prescribed number or more to remain in a specified period, and information necessary to specify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, due to the arrangement of various members, not only the game ball retention portion 38 but also the first guide member 375 is provided with a function of retaining the game balls 99, making it difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99. In such a case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it becomes possible to retain the game balls 99 of the specified number or more. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period, and there is a possibility that the information required to specify all the non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained during a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number to the specified number). In this case, for example, when the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is presented, all non-set values in one specific period information may be presented to identify In addition, when the number of game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball 373, for example, information corresponding to the number of winning the lottery, is presented, the winning of the lottery is presented. The expected number of information is presented according to the probability, and the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the specified number, so there is a possibility that not all the information required to identify all non-set values will be presented. There is As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the setting value is low (when the jackpot probability is low). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely ending the game on the game machine 10 during the game.

As a means for limiting the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game balls 99 in the vicinity of the special out ball opening 373 (by causing ball clogging), special It is conceivable to restrict the entry of the game ball 99 into the out ball passage 374 . According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained for a specific period by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring complicated configuration and control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38 . The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317 . Therefore, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball passage 373 is not expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special When detected by the out-ball sensor 384), it is treated as an out-ball.

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. is formed in A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376 . This second guide member 377 gathers the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31 in the same way as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318 . The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out-balls.

The game ball 99 that is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to the croon device 37 through the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372 . As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 37 . Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371, for example, because their kinetic energy is reduced, or collide with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 or other game balls 99, are usually out balls. Enter 378. A game ball 99 entering the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 change their moving direction due to collision with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or other game balls, etc., and enter the special out ball 373. do. A game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is released toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375 .

Here, the ball entry probability that the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enters the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. . In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of entering a ball or the expected number of entering a ball within such a range, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being specified early by the player, while at the same time it is possible to actually specify the setting value. be possible. As a result, when the set value is specified early, such as when the set value is low, the game on the gaming machine 10 is prevented from being terminated, and at the same time, the game machine is prevented from feeling bored due to the fact that the set value cannot be specified. It is possible to prevent the game at 10 from ending.

In this embodiment, the special out ball 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. is markedly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball opening 378, but instead of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball is inserted into the special out ball opening 373 by other means. It is also conceivable that 99 will make it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibition means for inhibiting entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball 373 . As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall surrounding the special out ball 373 that hinders the entry of the ball into the special out ball 373, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral part of the special out ball 373. Means for generating a force, and means for forming an air curtain by blowing air around the special out ball mouth 373 are conceivable.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening/closing the special out ball 373 may be provided, and the opening/closing part may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball 373 . In this case, the special out ball 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball 378, and the normal out ball 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball 373. good too.

Also, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crew device 37, and other means may be used. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, it may be divided into the normal out ball 378 and the special out ball 373. .

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention part 38 receives the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. is. Then, after the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and 7 A number is displayed on the segment display portion 39 . Here, FIG. 9 shows specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retaining portion, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth of the crew device, and a non-set value. It is a figure for demonstrating the prescribed period displayed on a 7 segment display part.

In the following, referring to FIG. 9, the specific period is defined as the period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the predetermined period is defined as As a period for cumulatively counting the number, all of the numbers (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period, or A part of the period will be described as being displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, but the "specified period" is not limited to the period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "predetermined period" is the crew device. It is not limited to the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the 37 special out balls 373 . That is, the "specified period", "predetermined period" and "prescribed period" include at least the period described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the specific period of time in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 is the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game after the jackpot game (opening) is started. A specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period until the game ends (starts the ending). That is, the beginning of the specific period is when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends (when the ending starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single-shot jackpot), the jackpot game is started during a specific period. to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), if you win a high probability big hit in low probability mode (if the first hit is a high probability big hit and the jackpot series starts), if you win a normal jackpot in high probability mode A period from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is specified for all the jackpot games executed until the jackpot series ends by the normal jackpot game. set as a period. That is, in the jackpot series, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games executed during the jackpot series.

In other words, the number corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period of one jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot or winning timing, 7 Segments A to G of the segment display portion 39 are turned on and off at the ending of the jackpot game, which is a prescribed period. In other words, the prescribed period is the probability that the lottery result in the big winning lottery set for the game machine 10 will be a big hit based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the specific period. is set as a period for displaying a number indicating a game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the 7-segment display section 39 .

Then, when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 in the specific period of one big win game is 7 or more and less than 14, the big win lottery set in the game machine 10 Numbers specifying game set values (a plurality of non-set values) other than game set values (set values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big win are displayed in a display order set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36 described later. , one is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specified period of time in the jackpot game. In addition, in the ending (regulation period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has passed, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 in the 7-segment display section 39. If the number is 20 or more, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, multiple non-set values are specified. are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, When the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. In addition, if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is less than 7 in the specific period of one jackpot game, 7 in the ending (regulation period) after the specific period in the jackpot game The segment display section 39 does not display even one number specifying a plurality of non-set values.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, every time a jackpot game is executed, a 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, is displayed based on the number of gaming balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during a specific period. 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed in the , and the setting value can be specified by displaying 5 numbers specifying the non-set values. For example, when the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game set value 1 is a non-set value, and when the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the game set value 2 can be specified as a non-set value, and the seven-segment display portion 39 can specify that the game set value 3 is a non-set value by displaying the number 3, and the seven-segment display portion 39 can specify that the number When 4 is displayed, it can be specified that the game set value 4 is a non-set value, and when the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game set value 5 is a non-set value. By displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display portion 39, it can be specified that the game set value 6 is a non-set value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be identified that the non-set values are the game set values 2 to 6, so that the set value is understood to be the game set value 1. can. Similarly, five numbers 1, 3 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 2. When the five numbers are displayed, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 3, and when the five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the set value is the game set value. It can be understood that the set value is 4, and five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that the set value can be recognized as the game set value 5, and 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It can be understood that the set value is the game set value 6 by displaying five numbers from .about.5.

Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are to be controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off. , the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When segment B, which is the second object to be controlled, is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, "5" and " 6” can be determined. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" are the segment, which is the fifth control target. The numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is lit or extinguished. In this embodiment, even if the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, all the segments A to G are controlled. Control to display the next priority number is not initiated unless it is targeted. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, it is easier than the case where the control for displaying the next priority number is started at the stage where the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped. A number of specific conditions must be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty until all the non-set values are identified, and thus the difficulty of recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short playing time. Therefore, even if the setting value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the setting value in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate of

It should be noted that when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become the control object, the control for displaying the next priority number is started. can be For example, when the priority order of numbers is "1"→"2"→"3"→..., the control order for the number "1" is the sixth segment F. When it is understood that the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is "1", the segment G, which has the seventh control order, is not set as a control target, and the number " 2” may be started. By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G become the objects of control, before all the segments A to G become the objects of control Even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the numbers to be displayed next is performed only after all the segments A to G have been controlled. does not start. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G become control targets, the next number to be displayed starts to be displayed. Until then, information is displayed on the 7-segment display 39 to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be displayed next after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player is displayed on the 7 segment display section 39. During the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, there is concern that interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, control for displaying the next priority number is performed. If it is started, after one non-set value can be identified, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of that non-set value will not become the control target. This prevents the loss of interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, during the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the normal jackpot open/close execution mode is started after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started. Until the end. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is ended (the ending of the normal jackpot game starts is the time point). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single-shot jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single-shot jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention portion 38 . Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when the probability variable jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variable jackpot and the jackpot series is started), the jackpot series is started for a predetermined period. It is a period from the start of the variable probability big winning game for the initial winning as a trigger to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal big winning game as a trigger for ending the big winning series. That is, in the case of a series of jackpots, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and a plurality of times are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when the jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game, or the game is not finished in the middle of the jackpot series. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 for each jackpot game, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the specific period ends. In addition, a predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot. is set to prevent the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Then, in the jackpot game, in the ending (specified period) after the specific period has passed, the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention section 38 in the specific period (the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 entered By controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99), information (all or part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) that can identify or guess the non-set value is displayed. In the ending after the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot has passed, a non-set value can be specified or guessed corresponding to the cumulative number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values other than the set values can be identified or guessed progresses the game, the game ends before the timing at which the non-set values can be identified or guessed. is prevented. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values can be specified or estimated can specify or estimate the non-set values, and the setting values can be specified by specifying all the non-set values. is also possible. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values can be specified or guessed.

Further, the specific period is set for each jackpot game started in a predetermined period, so that in the consecutive jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the final jackpot game of the jackpot consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the continuous jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in the single hit, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times the jackpot game is executed increases. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is greater in the consecutive jackpot than in the single hit, and in the consecutive jackpot, the higher the number of consecutive games. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 will increase. As a result, the player not only has a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained, but also obtains a lot of information for specifying or estimating the non-set value, so that the non-set value and the set value can be obtained. The benefit can be that the value is easier to guess or specify.

It should be noted that the start of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and the open/close execution mode starts (the opening of the first hit ends) not only at the start of the jackpot game. It may be at the time of Moreover, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the open/close execution mode for one jackpot game. Thereby, based on the number of specific conditions established when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 316 in the open/close execution mode (the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 ), information for specifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display 39 after the specified period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373. Focusing on the contents displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the user can enjoy the game by specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the displayed contents.

In addition, the start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in the low probability mode) is started. Instead, it may be set to a jackpot game. Preferably, the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), for example, the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first hit is finished). may Thus, by setting the start time of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single-shot jackpot or a consecutive jackpot. At least one chance to guess or specify a non-set value is guaranteed for the first hit.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. can be considered. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time saving mode that is shifted after the normal jackpot ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the description is based on the premise of a loop variable machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one and two types of mixed machines, a predetermined period is set according to the mode. It is also conceivable to set For example, in the V-ST machine, if there is no V prize in the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize in the first hit (variable jackpot ), the start of the first jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode is the start of a predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode with a big win without V prizes, or the end of a specified number of jackpot lotteries in a high-probability mode, etc. It is conceivable that it is the end of the predetermined period.

Also, the predetermined period may be set to a period during which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating the non-set value is displayed, and the normal game state (high probability mode and Low frequency support mode) period (period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), period of staying in the time saving mode (from the end of the normal jackpot to the normal game state) period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), until a predetermined number of jackpot lotteries are received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. period, a period until receiving a predetermined number of normal winning lotteries in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode, a predetermined number of game balls 99 in the general winning opening 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode is won, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode or A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 win the second winning hole 315 in both, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode , a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode. Moreover, the predetermined period may be set for each variation game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the entire period of one variation game may be the predetermined period, or a partial period of one variation game may be the predetermined period. When a partial period of one variation game is set as the predetermined period, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns until the decorative patterns reach the reach state, and from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns. The period until the development effect such as the special reach effect starts, the period from the decorative pattern reaching the reach state until the development effect starts, and the decorative pattern reaching the reach state until the development effect ends. period, a period during which the development effect is executed, and the like.

In this way, by setting the predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or guess the non-set value and recognize or guess the set value even during the period other than the period in which the jackpot game is executed. be possible. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

Then, when the predetermined period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, the sorting means such as the cloon device 37 normally hits the game ball 99 hit to the left side area of the game board 31. The position where 99 is distributed to the normal out ball 378 and the special out ball 373 (for example, the left area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) ) can also be considered. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special hit (right hit that hits the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, it is possible to enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while progressing the game as usual without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, depending on the type of specific condition, it is conceivable to set the start time of the predetermined period when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, as a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the crew device 37 being put into the special out ball mouth 373 in a predetermined period, a specific area other than the special out ball mouth 373 For example, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 is entered into various prize winning openings 313-316.

In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, etc. or passes through the through gate 317 is guided to the distribution means such as the crew device 37, and the game distributed by the distribution means. A specific condition may be that the ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 . In this case as well, it is possible to enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing a special launch.

Also, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that can occur in the progress of the game. The particular event in this case may be either favorable or unfavorable to the player. If a specific event is advantageous to the player, in addition to the benefit obtained by the occurrence of the specific event, the player may can be further obtained. On the other hand, if the specific event is a disadvantageous event for the player, the player may use all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. You can get more parts. As a specific event, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (executing a jackpot game a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), probability variation or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (once) (including ) or more winning (variable probability or normal jackpot game is executed more than a predetermined number of times (including 1 time)), the number of jackpot consecutive games reaches a predetermined number or more (usually probability change before winning a jackpot) Winning a jackpot consecutively for a predetermined number of times or more), reaching a jackpot lottery number of times equal to or more than a predetermined number of times until winning a jackpot, winning game balls 99 exceeding the upper limit in the round game in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. (Over winning) may occur.

Further, the specific event may be execution of a specific effect preset in a variation game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, for example, it may be set to any of non-reach effect and ready-to-win effect, and may be set to any of opening effect, round game effect and ending effect. Typically, the specific effect is a premium effect in which the jackpot or the probability variable jackpot is confirmed among the variable game effects, and the execution of the reservation series after the end of the jackpot game in the jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game, At the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, at a specific time of the jackpot game, the lottery results include jackpots in the suspension. . Furthermore, as a specific event, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols in the pattern display section 341 are displayed in a specific combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display). For example, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "777" in the pattern display unit 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-off point such as "767", a specific non-reach-off point such as "367" Temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) can be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is to be executed, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) is performed with the left and right decorative patterns in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7". It is conceivable that a symbol, such as "development", which clearly indicates that a development effect is to be executed, is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific combination of specific events.

Also, the specific condition may be established in relation to the set value. That is, a set value may be included in a specific condition, and for example, a specific condition may be established when a specific event occurs in a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is defined by the set value, as will be described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in a different order depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each setting value, for example, based on whether the probability of a jackpot lottery is high or low, and to characterize the display of numbers indicating multiple non-set values for each setting value. become.

In addition, the specified period for displaying the specific information indicating the non-set value or a part thereof (special information) when the specific condition is satisfied is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of the jackpot game, and other It may be timing, and it is conceivable to set according to the relationship with a predetermined period, the relationship with a specific period, the relationship with a specific condition, or the like. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the given period is typically set after the elapse of the given period as described in the second embodiment below, and the jackpot game Other than that, for example, it may be after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when the predetermined period is set to the execution period of the variable game, the specified period is, for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the reach state, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. Timing when the development production of is started, execution of the development production, etc. can be considered. In other words, it is conceivable to set the prescribed period to the period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value together with the result of the big winning lottery. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed in the pattern display section 341 by displaying the variation of decorative patterns, the pattern display section 341 can be made to display the specific information at the same time. As a result, the player's interest in the variable game can be enhanced by displaying the specific information.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is a section along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains, for a specific period, game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373. The retention lane 381 , a discharge lane 382 and a stopper portion 383 .

The staying lane 381 receives the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The stay lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381, and the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually recognized. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently with resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 . Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The display of the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be, for example, the number of lamps lit up, image display in the symbol display section 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 continues to the left end of the staying lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 to a predetermined position, for example, a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

A special out-ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382 . This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves through the discharge lane 382 . That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out-ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the output from the special out-ball sensor 384 is monitored by the MPU 41 so that the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved through the discharge lane 382 . Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out-ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 5 in processing. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and based on the number of special out balls and the set value, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays Contents are controlled (see command determination processing in FIG. 37 and setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Also, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio ramp control device 5 . In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the sound lamp controller 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384 .

The stopper part 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 by the stopper portion 383 being at the upper limit position (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 can be discharged through the discharge lane 382 by the stopper portion 383 being at the lower limit position (Fig. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for enabling the game balls 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and discharging the game balls 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383. Other means such as a stopper portion that can be rotated between the upright state and the prone state may also be used. In addition, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. . Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, by making the stay lane 381 stand by at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are retained, and by moving the stay lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are moved to the discharge lane 382. may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening from which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and the game board 31 from the opening. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position at which it can be discharged to the rear side of the . Also, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and a state in which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 are realized. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display portion 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display section 39 consists of 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and at least numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B) and at least A to The alphabet of F can be displayed. In this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 has a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) that the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot. A plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 from the value (numerical information) (Specific numerical information)) are displayed numerically by lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the number 1 is displayed by lighting the segments B and C, and the non-set value is the game set value. When the number is 2, the segments A, B, D, E and G are lit to display the number 2, and when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the segments A to D and G are lit. When the non-set value is the game set value 4, the segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, and the non-set value is the game set value. If the value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are illuminated to display the number 5, and if the non-set value is the game set value 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. The number 6 is displayed by being lit. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is illuminated at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

Also, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set values are changed, as will be described later (Figs. 36). Also, as will be described later, the control order of turning on or off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( fixed).

Then, in the 7-segment display section 39, a segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period) is displayed as described later. is controlled to be turned on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 does not indicate game set values, but indicates part of specific information indicating non-set values, and corresponds to special information. . In other words, the special information is displayed using part of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. In this way, not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that the player can see the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Not only can the non-set value be specified in the case, but also the non-set value can be guessed based on part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Therefore, even if the numbers are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the non-set value can be guessed based on a part of the numbers and enjoyed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In the 7-segment display section 39, whether or not each of the segments A to G is to be controlled may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it becomes easier to guess the set values than when it is not clearly indicated. Further, in this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly stated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method that makes it difficult to guess the setting value is adopted. It is When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, it is clearly indicated to the player that the segment is to be controlled. It is conceivable to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting it in a color different from the case where the segment is lit.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, the information for specifying the non-set value may be displayed in alphabetical characters corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the alphabet A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, and the non-set value is the game set value 3. When the non-set value is the game set value 4, the alphabet D is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the alphabet E is displayed and the non-set value is the game set value 6, the letter F may be displayed (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display portion 36 includes a normal symbol display portion 361, a first special symbol display portion 362, a second special symbol display portion 363, a first reserved number display portion 364 and a second reserved number, which are arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. A display unit 365 is provided.

The normal pattern display part 361 includes an LED pair as a normal pattern (normal pattern), and a lottery in the normal pattern per lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b executed with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger. Results are displayed by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair (variable display of normal symbols) triggered by the winning of the through gate 317, and turns on or off each LED after the lapse of the variable display time. display the results of

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the first winning port 314. The lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (first special lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (variation display of the first special symbol) triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314, and after the variation display time has elapsed, each segment is displayed. The result of the big win lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed when the second winning hole 315 is won. The lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (second special lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments in the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the 7 segments of the 7-segment display device (variation display of the second special symbol) triggered by the winning to the second winning port 315, and after the lapse of the variation display time, each segment The result of the big winning lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The first reservation number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and the number N of reservations of the first special figure of the variable display caused by winning the first prize opening 314 is displayed by the number of lighting of the four LEDs. indicate.

The second holding number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and the holding number M of the second special figure of the variable display caused by winning the second winning opening 315 is displayed by the number of lighting of the four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 12 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and the through gate 317. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 provides the sound lamp control device 5 with a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game Output commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, set value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. be. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b described later increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the variation pattern, and This command notifies the audio lamp controller 5 of the pending number N or the pending number M. FIG. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in a pending storage area 412b described later when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (see FIG. 22 described later). step S1207 or step S1209 of the first pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the pass/fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. is set in the game state transition processing in the main processing of . In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, the jackpot game is started by the sound lamp control device 5 receiving the jackpot game start command. It is possible to grasp not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the sound lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , It is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 to be described later. In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening is finished by the round game start command and the opening/closing execution mode is started. Alternatively, the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The round game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of ending the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. be.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and will be described later in FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control contents of the 7-segment display section 39 .

The set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the set value has been changed and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later. .

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 interrupts the main timer (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the control bodies in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electric worker reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display section 36 and the pattern display section 341. be Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning opening 315 is to be in the open state, and the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. and a normal winning initial value counter CIN2 used for . Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 performs variable display and stop display is referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 performs variable display and stop display is referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, corresponding to each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually may be provided in

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area of the first reservation storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, the variation game executed based on the success/failure information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB 19 In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 .

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the success/failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. stored in the area where In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the success/failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4, the first winning port 314 And it is possible to reserve up to four win/fail information as a winning history to the second winning hole 315, respectively.

In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are provided with a holding area with a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to eight. It is possible to reserve win/fail information as a prize history. The storage processing of the win/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the win/fail information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the success/failure information in the first pending area REA1 of the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA and the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the second pending storage area REB is 2 or more. , it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Also, it is possible to alternately move the win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB to the execution area AE as another embodiment.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REA1. The success/failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REB1. The success/failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 637, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is set in two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is the probability variable gaming state, by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 411 . Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each have a probability that the lottery results of the jackpot lottery will result in a big win (jackpot probability) as a game set value. A plurality of hit/fail tables are provided which are different depending on the situation. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of game set value 6, game set value 5, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the lottery result in the big lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player.

At the game set value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

At the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

At the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game set value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game set value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

Incidentally, if the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is also considered that the random numbers that result in a big win are common to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery between the same game set values, but that the random numbers that result in a big win are not common. be done. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game setting values of multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 0 to 9 10 The number of random numbers that will be the 16R probability variable jackpot is 5, 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will be the 5R normal jackpot is 5, 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is five of 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variable jackpot and The number of the fourth random numbers is 5 to 14, which is 10, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5, which is 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric role product 315b), the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and normal game state (low probability mode and electric role Compared to the low-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the object 315b is low), the expected value of acquisition of the game ball is set high when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning are individually shaken. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", "5R normal It is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times. The game continues until the game is completed, or ends when the player informs the player that the lottery result in the lottery for the big win is a big win before the specified number of times has passed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big hit is completed, a preset specified number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) jackpot If the lottery is executed in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the variable game as another embodiment. It should be noted that, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss in which the ready-to-win does not occur.

Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which a symbol combination of decoration symbols indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound ramp control device 5 provides rough variation game effects such as high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preset according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. are mapped. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the lottery. If the result is "out", the outlier fluctuation table is referred to and the type of fluctuation pattern is specified.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the normal reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341. is executed. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in the pattern display section 341. pattern is executed. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the super reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display section 341 determines the special reach pattern. A production pattern is executed. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the loss variation table, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding relationship with the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or front-rear out-of-rear reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type) and displays the pattern. In the part 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed. Further, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variable display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and displays the pattern. In the part 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is stopped without a notice effect such as displaying a character, message, etc. is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "05", there is a variation display of the failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped with a symbol, accompanied by an advance notice effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as an advance notice effect.

Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and any one of them is selected. A normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. Any Super Reach effect that has been done is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win effects to be executed in the special ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03". Any of the special reach effects that have been performed are executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

Note that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the state of operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation of the operation button 20 by the player. A player-participation type operation effect such as a repeated hitting operation effect in which repeated hitting operations are reflected in the effect, and a long-pressing operation effect in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 and the symbol display portion 341 of the main display portion 36, the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the result of the lottery is input to the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a variation pattern command " A01” to “A03” are output. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "C03". In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 generates variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating failure is added before the variation patterns "01" to "05". output either Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d contains the following types of game information: "number of balls out", "number of balls paid out to general winning opening", "number of balls paid out to first winning opening", "number of balls paid out to second winning opening". ”, “Variable number of prize-winning balls paid out”, “Set value”, “Base information”, “Continuous role ratio information”, “Accessory ratio information”, “Accumulated jackpot lottery number”, “Unit jackpot lottery number”, "Big win count" and "Consecutive loss count" are stored. Among these game information, "setting value", "base information", "consecutive role information", "accessory ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number" correspond to

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout ball number" is set by the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "first winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning hole 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "first winning hole payout number of balls" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the command setting process update to

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out to the second winning hole" is determined when the ball sensor 315a detects the winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state, and the prize balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 to be described later. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the second winning port 315 in the command setting process. update to

The “variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout number of balls" is set by the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning port 316 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "set value" is for selecting the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (determination of success/failure). In other words, the "set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, six levels of set values (six types of low-probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14(A)) and high-probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 14(B))) is prepared. The "set value" is updated in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

"Base information" is information related to the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" to the total number of payout balls. If the "base" is represented by a mathematical formula, it is "base" = 100 x ("number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening" + "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening") / "number of out balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous one. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM412. In addition, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the "base information" includes the previously described "general winning slot payout ball number" and "first winning slot Separately from the "number of balls to be paid out" and "number of balls to be out", "number of balls to be paid out to general winning opening", "number of balls to be paid out to first winning opening" and "number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past 3 or more 60,000 ball bases may be left as a history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

"Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). , it is information related to the "continuous accessory ratio", which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning opening. If the "continuous role ratio" is represented by a formula, it is "continuous role ratio"=100*"variable number of payout balls"/"total number of payout balls". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state. , a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) , and "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls of the second winning opening and the number of paid out balls of the variable winning opening. Expressing the "role product ratio" as a mathematical formula, "role product ratio"=100×("number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening"+"number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be a role ratio to the number of out balls reaching a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries" is the number of jackpot lotteries performed in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall. number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is the cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is executed with the winning of the first winning slot 314 in the normal game state as a trigger. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

“Number of unit jackpot lotteries” is the number of times a jackpot lottery has been received (main The number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion of the display portion 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the number of difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery number of times" is the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 with an average of 1000 yen (jackpot lottery number of times received). The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was started before the opening of the game hall. The "number of big hits" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the big win game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. Also, the "number of times of big wins" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Consecutive loss count" is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery have been lost continuously in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and when the lottery result is a jackpot, it is set to 0 times. cleared. The "number of consecutive failures" is the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. If it is out, it is incremented by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive losses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, which are called 4-digit 7-segment displays. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331. may be provided in Also, it is conceivable to display the “base information” using the first special symbol display portion 362 and/or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 .

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number "0" when displaying, a dot is lit and "0." is displayed. Also, when any one of the alphabets "A" to "F" is displayed, it is conceivable to light up dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 has four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, of which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays Indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments displaying the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 . For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation "BL" of the current base BL is "8." , and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" in the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3" and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing the switch, and is located at an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, enabling the performance display monitor 43 to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 18A is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is displayed as "base information". The ball base B1→the 60,000 ball base B2 the last time before→the current base BL is looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(D). 2 shows that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the game before last is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, e.g. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular time intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 . Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 . Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, in place of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", "continuous role ratio information" and "player ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may be displayed.

Also, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. , and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display. You may make it display a setting value.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing, and allows setting values to be changed by rotating when the 7-segment display is powered on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the setting value display unit 45 is in the off state and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the setting value display unit is turned on. A number is displayed at 45. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the set value display unit 45 is on, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted, thereby turning the set value display unit 45 off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display section 45 is in the lighting state and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, when the set value display section 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases, and when the set value display section 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases. The number displayed is smaller. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the setting value. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high-probability mode success/failure table (FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) can be used to make a jackpot lottery.

The method for changing the setting value is not limited to turning off the setting value display portion 45 after rotating the setting value change operation portion 46 . For example, a method of determining a setting value by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or setting by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly or for a long time. A method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the value display unit 45, and a method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key. A method such as changing the number displayed on the unit 45 and then removing the key may be used.

Here, the performance information display device 4A having the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. FIG. Also, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the external of the game machine 10 (front side of the front frame 11) is displayed. ), it is possible to select a visible state or an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is opened with respect to the front frame 11. , the setting value display section 45 can be visually recognized. As a result, when a player executes a game on the gaming machine 10, unless the game board 31 is opened, the setting value display portion 45 is not visually recognized. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. When the set value display section 45 is in the lit state, the set value change operation section 46 is pressed to turn off the set value display section 45 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display portion 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, the set value display portion 45 can be visually recognized by opening the game board 31 due to jamming of balls in the game machine 10 or the like. Even in this state, the set value display section 45 can prevent the player from grasping the set value.

On the other hand, the set value display section 45 is turned on by pressing the set value change operation section 46 when it is in the off state, and the number corresponding to the set value is hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, the game board 31 is opened with respect to the front frame 11, and the set value display unit 45 is turned on by performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation unit 46. The set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display section 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value change operation section 46. FIG. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the secrecy of the setting value during the business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on control signals input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the pattern display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display section 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, based on the command input from the main control device 4. , the 7-segment display section 39, and the like can be controlled. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 (special out A state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged through the discharge lane 382 is selected. Each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51 . Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display section 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output presentation, a lamp presentation by the flashing mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, changes the variation pattern (decorative symbol stop symbol combination (see FIG. 38A)), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 38 (B))) and production pattern type (see FIGS. 39(A) to 37(C)) are determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37 (see step S2105 in the command determination process of ), the pattern display unit 341 is caused to start the pattern variation display. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 and the like, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, ready-to-win effect images, jackpot effect images, and loss effect images. ing. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be paid out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stopping switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. In the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. do. Furthermore, when the special out-ball sensor 384 detects a special out-ball sensor 384 , the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command and stores this special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start-up winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process that enables the launch of the . Further, the shooting control process disables the shooting of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electricity holding area 412c. Perform slew gate processing to be performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that it is a normal win when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and it is a failure when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. judge there is. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win occurs when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and fails when the normal win random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. judge there is. Then, when the MPU 41 determines in the through gate process that the win is normal, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314. FIG. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102. ), and the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23 and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the contents of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the variation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. A first pending command setting process for setting the first pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. ), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23 and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB in the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, before the propriety information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing described later (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), the propriety information The content is confirmed, and the second reserved command setting process is executed to set the second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process in FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), variation pattern and information such as the number of pending N . The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202 : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main processing described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag which is set to OFF when transitioning to another game state such as state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. Based on, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low-probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. Based on the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the big hit.

Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, the suitability determination is executed based on the high-probability mode suitability table or the low-probability mode suitability table that is stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. , in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change processing of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to winning the jackpot (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the winning/failure information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type The counter value of counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which win/fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number N contained in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 corresponds to the right/fail information stored in the first reservation command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 together with the command of . Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as regular processes with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next period. be.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412 commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set. If so, it sends that command to the audio lamp controller 5 . Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314. The number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41, in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when the winning of the second winning opening 315 has occurred, the RAM 412 The number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is won in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. is added to the value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variation game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variation game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. be done. At this time, the MPU 41 is the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game (jackpot type ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 changes the game state to a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high It is shifted to a time-saving game state which is a frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variable game for notifying the lottery result ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery which triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "jackpot count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes set value change processing. In this set value change process, a process of controlling display or non-display of the set value or change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. FIG. Details of the set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the set value change process is executed in the main process, but it is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process until the game ball is started to be launched. It is also conceivable that it is executed by As a result, after the game is started by the player, the setting value cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time, so that the setting value can be prevented from being changed during the business hours of the game hall. .

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S<b>1309 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1311>
At step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variation game control process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is executed. When the game ends and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot game is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot game state in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag set to .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. It is determined based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
At step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. Then, when it is determined that the variation display time has not passed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the fluctuation game in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 is the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the pending storage area 412b, the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform variation display based on the success/failure information, and terminates the variation game control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes) , the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE The pass/fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves when both or one of the pending number M and the pending number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, is set to ON. . When the game state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and when the game state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the game state is the low probability mode. If so, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 stores data in the reserved storage area 412b based on the high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14B) that is stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 stores a reserved storage area based on the low-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14A) that is stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined.

Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, the suitability determination is executed based on the high-probability mode suitability table or the low-probability mode suitability table stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. , in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change processing in FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game to the variable display time counter. Specifically, the MPU 41, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the normal jackpot, the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(A)) Identify. In addition, MPU41, when the result of the success or failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15 (B)) to specify the variation pattern based on . Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command including the lottery result of the big winning lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 5, and the audio ramp control device 5 displays the pattern based on the variation pattern command. Symbol variation display by the unit 341 and the like are executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that the 5R normal jackpot is "A01" to " A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot to the variation patterns "01" to "03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot "C01" to "C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the variation patterns "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating failure to the variation patterns "01" to "08". It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 36, and terminates the variation start process. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 36, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display section 36 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412 . Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss determination based on the low-probability mode win/fail table in step S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of times of consecutive failures" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the win/loss result is a jackpot. If there is, clear "Consecutive Loss Count" to 0 times.

[Set value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, at step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON at step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value When the change process is terminated and the jackpot game state is not set (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, setting It is determined whether or not the value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn on the power of the set value display unit 45 . That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the game is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and switches the power of the setting value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (step S1704). , the number indicating the read setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This makes it possible to confirm the current set value. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). In other words, if the set value display unit 45 is not turned on and the power is not turned on, the set value change process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation, and vice versa. In addition, when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before the rotation is displayed.

When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the set value display section 45 displays is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "1", the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the left direction. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is "1". In addition, it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as the setting value, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value saved in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as the effective setting value of the game information in the RAM 412. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, the set value saved in the RAM 412 is changed. By turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the setting value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not the set value has been changed. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation unit 46 to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45 . When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. If so (step S1711: No), the set value change process is terminated. When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the setting value display unit 45 displays a number indicating the setting value when the energization to the 7-segment display is interrupted. is extinguished, and the set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the low probability mode right/wrong table corresponding to the set value saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 at step S1710. (See FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) corresponding to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are displayed. is selected. That is, since the same set value is selected for the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the setting value can be easily changed. However, the set value in the low-probability mode and the set value in the high-probability mode may be changed separately. In this case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set to different levels (numerical values), for example, the low probability mode setting value is set to "1" and the high probability mode setting value is set to "6". it becomes possible to

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and when the number of out balls read reaches 60000 balls. (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), the process proceeds to step S1805. The process proceeds to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 determines the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1801, the number of general winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and the number of first winning opening payout balls. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening)/the number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls reaches 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805-S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29(A) and 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before in the base information (step S1805). BL is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls and the number of out balls for base calculation, which are stored as the base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808). ).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is finished, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809). ), and the specific performance information update process ends. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, the role ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main processing of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 to be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. exit.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. S1908), it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "1", "2" and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted in the performance display monitor 43, thereby turning off the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are extinguished.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922). , the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. exit.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the 60,000-ball base B2 before the last time is displayed. Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 performs display order setting processing (step S2000), counter update processing (step S2001), command determination processing (step S2002), variable game effect processing (step S2003) in the sub timer interrupt processing. , jackpot game effect processing (step S2004), and setting value suggestion processing (step S2005) are executed.

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, and displays the 7 segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. The order of numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing the set value suggesting process in the jackpot game for a predetermined period, five numbers for specifying a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values) other than the set value are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example. Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. . Also, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub-timer interrupt process by the start-up process of the sound lamp control device, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed for a predetermined period. The numerical order is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

By the way, the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. As a result, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed. display can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Here, if the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012; transition to

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the set value change flag is ON (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed. It is set to ON in step S2121. When the setting value change flag is ON (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to OFF (step S2013), and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period is set when the set value is changed. By setting the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 when the setting value is changed in this way, it is possible to determine the display order of the numbers according to the setting value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set values from the RAM 512, and further refers to the set values and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 (see FIG. 36). step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) shows the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with the display order of numbers in .

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display order determination table, a lottery is drawn for each game set value 1 to 6 (set value 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. The display order of numbers is defined by random numbers. There are 120 lottery random numbers from 0 to 119, each lottery random number is associated with one display order, and each display order has the same selection probability. The display order is A1 to A120 selected for the setting value 1, B1 to B120 for the setting value 2, C1 to C120 for the setting value 3, and setting Including the display order D1 to D120 selected for the value 4, the display order E1 to E120 selected for the setting value 5, and the display order F1 to F120 selected for the setting value 6, and the setting value 1 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set for each of .about.6.

The display orders A1 to A120 selected when the setting value 1 is selected are the five numbers "2" specifying the game setting values (non-set values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" specifying the setting value 1. to define the display order of "6" (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when the setting value is 1, and one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" specifying the setting value 1 is seven segments. It is never displayed on the display unit 39 .

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value 2 is selected specifies the setting values '1', '3' to '6' other than the number '2' which specifies the setting value 2, and the setting values 2 to 6. The order of displaying the five numbers "2" to "6" is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when the setting value is 2, and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" specifying the setting value 2 is seven segments. It is never displayed on the display unit 39 .

The display orders C1 to C120 selected when the setting value 3 is selected are five numbers "1", " 2” and “4” to “6” are displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the set value is 3, the number "3" specifying that the set value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. never.

The display orders D1 to D120 selected when the setting value 4 is selected are the five numbers "1" to "" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number "4" specifying the setting value 4. 3”, “5”, and “6” are displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the set value is 4, the number "4" specifying that the set value is 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. never.

The display orders E1 to E120 selected when the setting value 5 is selected are the five numbers "1" to "4" specifying the setting values 1 to 4 and 6, other than the number "5" specifying the setting value 5. , "6" are displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" specifying the set value 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. never.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6 displays the five numbers "1" to "5" that specify the set values 1 to 5 other than the number "6" that specifies the set value 6. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the number "6" specifying that the setting value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. never.

When the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and terminates the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the set value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. The order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set according to the game set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table. The display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order during a predetermined period when a predetermined condition (for example, power-on or setting change) is satisfied. Since the game machine 10 is often turned on before the game hall opens, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the game machine 10 is turned on. The display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 does not change. display can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the game machine 10 is powered on and when the set value is changed. , and other conditions (predetermined conditions) may be satisfied. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in a third embodiment described later, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game. is started. Even if the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set by satisfying these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, repeated presentation of the same information on the 7-segment display section 39 and monotonous display of information on the 7-segment display section 39 can be prevented.

Further, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), for the same setting value, the probability of selecting all the number display orders is the same, but the probability of selecting the number display order is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability of selecting at least part of the number display order for the same set value is different from other number display orders. That is, it is conceivable to make a specific display order more likely to be selected and, conversely, to make it more difficult to select a specific display order. If the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected according to the setting value is set to be different from other number display orders, a specific number display order is likely to be selected according to the setting value. It is also possible to make it difficult to choose a particular number display order. That is, unlike the case where the probability of selecting the display order of all the numbers is the same, it is easy to specify the specific non-set values, and conversely, it is difficult to specify the specific non-set values. It is also possible to This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) is delayed. can be In this case, if the setting value is low, the possibility of the setting value being high is left until the end, so that the player can expect that the setting value is high, and the setting value is low. Premature identification by the player is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early while suppressing the decrease in interest in the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 . Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (e.g. set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value (e.g. set value 2 or less) is delayed. may In this case, the number corresponding to the high setting value and the number corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until immediately before the setting value is identified as the high setting value. It leaves the possibility that it is at the low setting until just before it realizes that it is at the high setting. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to whether the high set value is advantageous to the player or the low set value is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the feeling of excitement right up to the moment when the high set value is grasped. . It is also conceivable that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not late, for example, the display order that makes it easy to select the slowest display order, regardless of the set value. In this case, since the number indicating the most unfavorable non-set value for the player is displayed last, until the last number is displayed, the most unfavorable non-set value for the player and the player's There remains the possibility of non-set values in favor of As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the game set value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game on the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from being terminated early. It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate of the machine.

Also, it is conceivable to set the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set value and the number indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value so that the display order of the numbers is later so that it is easy to select. For example, at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to the low set value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to the high set value are selected. It is also conceivable to make it easier for In this case as well, until just before the player grasps the set value, there is a possibility that the set value is a high set value that is advantageous to the player and a possibility that the set value is a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player. Until just before grasping, you can enjoy the thrilling feeling of whether it is a high setting value or a low setting value.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (the set value is 6), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values higher than the set value is set so that it is easy to select the display order of the numbers. can be considered. For example, the priority of numbers indicating non-set values that have a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value is set higher than the number that indicates non-set values that have a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. can be considered. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set value, the player expects the possibility that the set value is higher than the actual set value just before grasping the set value. can be done. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before grasping the set value. Conversely, except when the set value is the lowest set value (the set value is 1), it is easier to select the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to non-set values lower than the set value is later. It is conceivable to set For example, the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with lower probability of advantageous judgment than the set value is set higher than the number indicating non-set values with higher probability of advantage judgment than the set value. can be considered. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values lower than the set value in this way, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set value are displayed as non-set values immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a display number. As a result, the final set value candidates are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, since the game set values that are advantageous to the player are grasped as the set values in the end, the pleasure when the set values are grasped is improved.

Also, regardless of the setting value, it is conceivable to set the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) so that the display order of the numbers is later so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that the number display order can be easily selected. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player comprehends the set value, the player can expect the possibility that the set value is high, which is advantageous to the player. You can enjoy guessing (setting value).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, effect pattern type counter, variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Also, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S2002), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and is processed, and is stored in the processing work storage area, for example. remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38 (A)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 38 (B)) and an effect type table ( 39(A) to 39(C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512, the variation pattern is determined. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to ON. is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 39A), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 39B), and a special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the decoration symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 38(A) shows that the decorative patterns are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a pattern combination indicating that the probability variable jackpot (either the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot), “777” ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no sorting of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected from decoration symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop pattern, and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of decorative patterns can stop and display the symbol combination of the second order other than the "333" pattern combination suggesting the 5R normal jackpot. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a decorative pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop pattern, the MPU 51 indicates that the jackpot game is a 5R probability variable jackpot. The specified 5R probability variation promotion performance is executed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16 probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative patterns of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns of "1" to "9" Design is determined. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the decorative pattern indicates a 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', when ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes 16R promotion performance for indicating 16R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Then, when the lottery result is a big win and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display portion 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns "1" to "9", and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-to-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The display control device 6 may determine the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped. may decide.

Also, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". In addition, the variation pattern command "B02" with the lottery result "5R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". A variation pattern command "C03" having a lottery result of "16R probability variable jackpot" and a variation pattern of "03" is associated with a variation display time of "90 s" and a variation type of "special ready-to-win effect pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" with the lottery result "loss" and the variation pattern "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "D05" with the result "off" and the variation pattern "05" is associated with the variation display time "10 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 39A to 39C are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. It is a super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual effect type is the super ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 39(C) is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special ready-to-win effect. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (A), the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss) "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type selection table are productions in which, for example, normal ready-to-win production is executed in which the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed. , The final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects a super ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and furthermore, as the final individual production type, the expected degree of jackpot is higher than the normal ready-to-win production. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into the super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, in the special ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the special ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern type selection table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are executed as the final individual production type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win production and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without going through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. You can

Then, the MPU 51 stores a display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table and the effect type counter, and the display variation pattern combination of the decorative symbols determined based on the effect type counter and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512. set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for identifying the combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and determines the command. End the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of The variation of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the decoration pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. .

Further, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effecting flag to ON. This variable game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect which are executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not the opening effect start process is executed in the big win game effect process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making a decision.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2109: No), the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310), and terminates the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, MPU51, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is the main timer of FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, if the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No). , the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The special out-ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out-ball counter in step S2208 in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), the process proceeds to step S2116. The process proceeds to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Further, the ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the set value suggesting process of FIG. be.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, whether or not the ending effect end process is executed. It is referred to when judging Also, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display control process of FIG.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a set value change command. The setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the game setting value after the change, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. . Here, if the received command is a set value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a set value change command (step S2119: No), the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command determination process. The setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the secondary timer interrupt processing, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, when the variation pattern command is received, the command determination processing of FIG. A variable game effect in line with the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the secondary timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending addition image showing the display result of the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed in the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion process]
In the set value suggesting process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39 are controlled. be done. Further, in the set value suggesting process, a process of displaying on the symbol display section 341 an ending addition image showing the display result of the 7-segment display section 39 in the big winning game is executed as an ending effect of the big winning game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206. transition to

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 , the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382 . At this time, the game ball 99 moving from the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 .

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 turns on the stopper portion downward movement flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is downwardly moving. (step S2203). The stopper portion downward movement flag is referenced in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 or not. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), further sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S2205), End the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to on in step S2203, is set to on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 . Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207 when the stopper part downward movement flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), and proceeds to the process when the stopper part downward movement flag is OFF (step S2206: No). The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper portion downward movement flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the process proceeds. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
At step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the lowering time counter set at step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is determined by whether or not the special out ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. can be judged by If the condition for returning the stopper part 383 to the upper limit position is that no special out ball is detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, the special out balls can be accurately counted. .

Here, if the value of the lowering time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212, and if the value of the lowering time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), End the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward motion counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2203. The set stopper portion downward movement flag is set to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 .

<Step S2214>
In step S<b>2214 , the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 . That is, the MPU 51, for each jackpot game, at the ending of the jackpot game after the elapse of a specific period, according to the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device during the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game. 7-segment display unit control processing for controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. Details of the 7-segment display section control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes ending additional image control processing for displaying an additional image corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending addition image control processing, it becomes possible to confirm the lighting/light-out state of the 7-segment display section 39 also in the pattern display section 341 . The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper portion downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2216). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the jackpot game effect (ending effect) to end by means of the jackpot game effect end flag. Here, when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting Terminate value suggestion processing.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G lit in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 when the jackpot game effect is terminated. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39 can be lit only during the ending of the big win game.

Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39, game setting values (non All or part of the number corresponding to the setting value) is displayed. Therefore, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is executed. As a result, the player can specify or guess the non-set value each time a big win game is executed, so that the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value in the big win game. In addition, by obtaining information that can specify or estimate non-set values for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of jackpot runs increases, all (five) non-set values are grasped. In this case, it is possible to grasp the set value. In other words, the player can grasp the setting value based on the specified non-setting value, so that it becomes possible to guess the setting value in the jackpot game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
At step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggesting effect.

[7-segment display section control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display section control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display unit control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by adding it in step S2208 in the set value suggesting process of FIG. (Step S2301), it is determined whether or not the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (Step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode of the big win. Then, if the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, is 0 ( Step S2302: No) Since none of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 need to be lit, the 7-segment display section control process is terminated.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
At step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display section control information from the 7-segment display section control information storage area (see FIG. 42A) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display section control information is information necessary to control the 7 segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is accumulated). . Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display section 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display section control information read out from the 7-segment display section control information storage area in step S2303. is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled based on this control content (step S2305). Details of the determination of the control content and the control for the 7-segment display section 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display section control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display section control process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 42A shows an example of a 7-segment display section control information storage area, and FIG. 42B shows an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of an initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display section control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area displays the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is accumulated). This is an area for storing the order of numbers to be displayed and the order of controlled objects of segments A to G when each number is displayed. This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

In the number display order storage area, the 7-segment display unit 39 and the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot). It stores the order of numbers to be displayed (number display order). The number display order is determined by the display order setting process shown in FIG. 35 based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36), which is set for the set value that defines the probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win. determined in In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42(B), the display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table in the case of the setting value 1 in the above-described number display order setting process, and 7 in a predetermined period. "2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6" is stored as the display order of numbers on the segment display portion 39. FIG. That is, as long as the setting is not changed during the operation of the game hall, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order for a predetermined period of the same business day is fixed. . In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, every time the predetermined period starts, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display section 39. Numbers that are early in the numerical display order are easy to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the numerical display order are difficult to be displayed. For example, if the number display order is "2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so "2" and "3" are likely to be displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to display "5" and "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily specified while allowing the setting value to be estimated and specified, so that the user can enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. In addition, since the numerical display order is fixed during the business day, numbers with early numerical display order are easy to display, and numbers with late numerical display order are difficult to be displayed. (When the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting is low even with a small number of initial wins. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely terminating the game in the gaming machine 10 during play, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, it is expected that more numbers will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as the number of times of the specific period in the predetermined period increases (the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases). Therefore, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can be specified among a plurality of non-set values other than the set values also increases. As a result, since the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, a large amount of information for specifying the non-set value can be obtained, so that the candidates for the set value can be narrowed down. By allowing 35 or more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, the player can specify all the non-set values and, as a result, recognize the set values. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all the non-set values, that is, to recognize the set values. The progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether it is a normal jackpot or not, and the amusement of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the one set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the settings are changed, and when a jackpot game for a jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is started. may be determined to In this way, the number display order is determined when a big win game such as the first win is started, and the number display order is determined, for example, every predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the display order of the numbers, so that variations in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, for the purpose of specifying all the non-set values and recognizing the set values, the player can determine the values displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 in the past. The user can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a number that does not exist will be displayed.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . The segment control order is fixed to segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10 rather than being determined by turning on the gaming machine 10, changing settings, winning a jackpot, or the like. Thus, by fixing the segment control order as an order unique to the game machine 10, the player can control the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. This allows the player to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 even before the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

It should be noted that the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined when the game machine 10 is turned on or when setting values are changed, similar to the number display order, but is also determined for each business day. It is also conceivable to In this case, compared to the case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. This increases the difficulty of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set value, so for example, when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is low) , it is possible to prevent the player from early recognition of the low setting. This prevents the player from prematurely terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Also, the segment control order is determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), as described in the third embodiment below. good too.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the previously displayed information storage area stores information about numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period, numbers in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been controlled. area. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information related to a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes number 1 already displayed flag, number 2 already displayed flag, number 3 already displayed flag, number 4 already displayed flag, number 5 already displayed flag, and number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display is displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in section 39 . The number 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display has been displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in section 39 . The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display has been displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in section 39 . The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display has been displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in section 39 . The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display has been displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in section 39 . The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the 7-segment display has been displayed for a predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 6 is not displayed in section 39 .

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is a display target number in the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. When this number 1 display target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39, and when it is set to OFF, the number 1 is displayed in the 7-segment display. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 . The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 . The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 . The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 . The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 . The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. It indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39 .

The target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is subject to lighting/light-out control in display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This target segment flag information includes segment A target flag, segment B target flag, segment C target flag, segment D target flag, segment E target flag, segment F target flag, and segment G target flag. including. The segment A target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment A target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment A has become a control target in display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment B target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display section 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed for a predetermined period. When this segment B target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment B has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment C target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment C has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment D target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment D has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment E target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment E target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment F target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment F target flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled. The segment G target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment G target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment G has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. is not controlled.

In the already displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all flags included in already displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state is the state outside the predetermined period, that is, at the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot (first jackpot) in the low probability mode (the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 at the beginning of a predetermined period for accumulating). In this embodiment, all the flags contained in the already displayed information storage area are stored when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot in step S2405 in the ending addition image control process in FIG. That is, it is set to off (cleared) when it is a normal jackpot set at the end of the predetermined period.

43 to 45 are diagrams showing control examples (display examples) of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control information storage area and update examples of the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an update example of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS.

As described above, in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display section 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). Thereafter, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. It is determined according to the number of game balls 99 entering 373). For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)) and the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, the 7 segments A to G of the 7 segment display section 39 Some of the segments are subject to lighting and extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during a specific period is 5), the control order storage area When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the previously displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. The five segments A to E of are subject to control of lighting and extinguishing. When the contents of the control sequence storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B), the numeral 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, and so on. Segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, the segment A, segment B, and segment A shown in FIG. D and segment E are changed to an illuminated partial control state.

Note that the change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43A to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. may be performed stepwise by turning on or off. Further, when the segments A to E are turned on or off in order as objects to be controlled, the segments A to E to be controlled may be flashed to indicate that they are objects to be controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display section 39 ends, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. The initial state in which all flags are set to OFF is updated to the content shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), five segments A to E out of segments A to G of the number 2 displayed first on the seven-segment display section 39 are controlled. segment F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the displayed number flag information, none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed. , the number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag remain off. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag corresponding to the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. Further, in the displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are to be controlled, segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, and segment D already targeted flag for segments A to E are displayed. , and the segment E existing flag is set to ON.

Also, when the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. When the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the specified period exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during a specific period is 10), the 7 segment display section 39 A total of 10 segments A to G are subject to control. That is, in the 7-segment display section 39, the 7 (all) segments A to G are controlled to be turned on and off, so that the 7-segment display section 39 displays the first number in the order of display, and then the second display. The three segments A to C with respect to the number of the order are controlled for the second turn on/off. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. ), the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, the segments A, B, D, E and G are displayed as shown in FIG. is turned on, and segments C and F are turned off, whereby the 7-segment display section 39 changes to an all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed. ) is changed to a partial segment control state in which the segments A to C shown in FIG. 44(C) are controlled. In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), since the second number displayed is 3, segments A to C are lit.

44(A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), and from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the part shown in FIG. 44(C). The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by sequentially lighting or extinguishing the segments A to G or the segments A to C. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are turned on or off in order, the segment to be controlled may be flashed to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

Also, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the previously displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the partially-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C) through the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B). 45(A) and 45(B) from the initial state where all flags are set to off as shown in FIG. 45(C) is updated. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44B, all the segments A to E of the segments A to G for the number 2 displayed first on the seven-segment display section 39 are to be controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45A, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. When all the target flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 is finished, so that the already displayed number flag information shows the number The 2 already displayed flag is set to ON, and in the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF while the currently displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. After that, in the already displayed segment flag information, all the already targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to OFF. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, in the already displayed segment flag information, the segment A existing target flag, segment B existing target flag, and segment C existing target flag for segments A to C are set to ON. That is, each time all the target flags of the already displayed segment flag information are set to ON (each time seven segments A to G are set as control targets), the displayed number flag information has become the display target. The displayed flag for the number is set to ON, and the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next display target number is set to ON. set.

As described above, by controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 can be performed. All or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big win are displayed. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

By the way, some game machines, such as the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, have a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select the set values. In this case, the game hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected ball output value. When the setting value is set low, it is desirable to prevent the player from stopping the game due to the player recognizing that the setting value is low. There is a tendency to hope that it is a game machine.

On the other hand, the player can guess (narrow down to a plurality of set values) or recognize the set values for the game machines having the set values, in order to play the game in the gaming machine 10 with the higher expected ball output value. I hope for a playfulness. Thus, there is a tendency for game halls and players to desire contradicting gaming machines that suggest or specify game set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning port 316, the special A game ball (special out ball) entering the out ball mouth 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention part 38.例文帳に追加Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) staying in the staying lane 381 after the elapse of a specific period is counted, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled according to the number of counts. do. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor illuminated unless at least the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a jackpot and the game is shifted to the jackpot game. Therefore, the setting values are not assumed or recognized unless the game is shifted to a big winning game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37. A game ball 99 is expected to enter. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value by the 7-segment display section 39 in one big win. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 starts a jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low-probability mode becomes a jackpot, and then ends the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game (ending It is controlled according to the total number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period until the start). In other words, if the first win is a probability variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot succession in the high probability mode continues, and the normal jackpot game will be opened and closed when the normal jackpot is won. Continue until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, although it has a game property that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and the set value, the more the jackpot succession in the high probability mode continues, the more the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 When many game balls 99 are expected to enter, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 in a predetermined period A non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, there is information that allows estimation of the set value according to the number of specific conditions that have been established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is low in the single-shot jackpot, the non-set value (set value) is difficult to guess or recognize. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot consecutive games, if the number of consecutive games is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). Since the expected value of the number of hits of 99 is high, the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced. That is, in this embodiment, the set value can be estimated by specifying or estimating part or all of the plurality of non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. be. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), the non-set value (set value) can be set more accurately by the jackpot series while meeting the wishes of the store. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the wishes of the player side. As a result, the gaming machine 10 is provided that meets the demands of both the store side and the player side.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed may display an image suggesting or specifying a set value. Images that suggest or indicate set values are displayed, for example, on the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screen for ART or AT, continuation screen, and end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. be done. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a set value as a jackpot game end screen, etc., there is a certain probability that a specific set value or more (for example, intermediate setting value (setting values 4 to 6) or higher), high setting value (for example setting value 5 or 6), odd setting value (for example setting value 1, 3 or 5), even setting value ( For example, setting value 2, 4 or 6), not a specific setting value (e.g. negation of setting value 1), or the highest setting value (e.g. setting value 6) are presented. .

However, in suggesting or specifying setting values in conventional slot machines, there is a high probability that a default screen that does not suggest or specify setting values will be presented so that setting values cannot be easily specified or guessed. The probability that a suggestive or explicit screen is presented is set low. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a set value that the set value is advantageous to the player or indicating that the set value is a specific set value is set low. In addition, the suggestion of the odd set value or the even set value tends to have a low reliability, and the reliability is often set to about 60%, for example. Further, slot machines suggest or specify a high setting, but do not suggest or specify a high setting (e.g., setting 5 or 6), especially the highest setting. No suggestion or explicit denial of a set value (eg, set value of 6) is performed. That is, the slot machine does not present disadvantageous information to the player, such as denying the high set value.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, it is set according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. Information whose value can be estimated (non-set value) is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display section 39 . That is, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify or guess a part of the non-set values, so that the set values can be guessed. Since all non-set values can be recognized by displaying numbers, it is possible to specify the set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is fundamentally different from the one that suggests or indicates the set value at a constant rate, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. The set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Or it is suggested, and in this respect also, it is different from the conventional gaming machine in which the suggestion or indication of the set value is executed at a constant rate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, the difficulty of identifying or guessing part or all of a plurality of non-set values decreases. is different from suggesting or specifying the set value of

Then, in this embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. is presented, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency of presentation of information for specifying set values does not decrease, and as long as a predetermined period continues (a series of jackpots continues Since the presentation of the information for specifying the non-set value (set value) is continued for as long as possible), it is possible to further enjoy guessing the set value, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, all non-set values can be identified when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values during a predetermined period. In other words, regardless of whether the non-set value is high or low, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the set value is suggested or specified in the conventional slot machine, even information disadvantageous to the player is presented to negate the maximum set value. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as the information for specifying or estimating the setting value, so that the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It is possible to judge whether or not On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or higher) so that the display order of numbers is later so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that the number display order can be easily selected. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player grasps the set value, the player can expect the possibility that the set value is high, which is advantageous to the player. You can enjoy guessing (setting value).

[Ending addition image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending addition image control process, the MPU 51 updates in step S2401 with various information in the already displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. The already displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are read, and based on these information, an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that indicates the display content of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that can specify or guess the non-set value (FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command for causing the pattern display section 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the symbol display portion 341 displays an additional image as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in the probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is a screen of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in the normal jackpot. For example. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C) are screen examples (set value suggesting screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of the probability variable jackpot game, as the first half part of the ending production, the pattern display unit 341 clearly indicates that the transition to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is performed after the probability variable jackpot game ends. image is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, as the first half part of the ending production, the symbol display unit 341 displays a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode (time reduction mode) after the end of the normal jackpot game. An image is displayed that clearly indicates the transition to In addition, in the first half of the ending effect, in addition to an image clearly indicating the game mode to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game, an image clearly indicating the number of consecutive jackpot games and the number of balls is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process of FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period. It includes five setting value suggesting images imitating a 7-segment display 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43A to the display state shown in FIG. An additional image including an image simulating the display state of is displayed in the pattern display section 341 as the second half part of the ending effect. Further, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) through FIG. 44(B) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggesting image simulating the display state shown in FIG. Is displayed. Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by the end of the predetermined period, each number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C). An additional image including a set value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed in the pattern display section 341 as the second half part of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . In this case, it can be identified that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period is added as the second half part including five set value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39. displayed as an image. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, when the 7-segment display section 39 does not know that the information about the non-set value is displayed, or when the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 are overlooked, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the display content on the 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending and recognize or guess the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 for each jackpot game.

As the ending effect of the jackpot game, it is a matter of design whether or not an additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display portion 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display portion 341 or not. It is conceivable that the additional image is not displayed on the pattern display portion 341 in . In this way, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there is a number that was displayed in the past during the predetermined period, it will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 first unless the number is memorized or recorded. It becomes difficult to identify or guess the non-set value based on the number entered, and thus to guess or recognize the set value. That is, by not displaying the additional image in the ending effect, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 can be recognized at an early stage, and at least the set value is not high. can be prevented from being recognized. As a result, the game of the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from being terminated early, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 can be suppressed.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending addition image control process exit.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags to off), and terminates the ending addition image control process. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the previously displayed information storage area when the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be identified or estimated, in order to identify the non-set value (set value) or increase the accuracy of estimation, in a predetermined period It is necessary to enter more game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and the hurdles are high until the non-set value (set value) is specified. Therefore, there is an advantage for the game hall that the set values are not easily known to the players. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to specify or guess the set value. In addition, it is possible to specify or guess the set value when winning the jackpot lottery. The gaming machine 10 can be provided with the game property of becoming recognizable. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Also, when a jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended during the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing (the end of the predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed progresses the game, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. It is possible to prevent the game from ending just before it becomes possible to guess. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena actions of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values (set values) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode of the first win, at least one time until the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed. Not only is the jackpot winning a condition, but even if the predetermined period has started, the hurdles to identifying the non-set value (set value) are high as described above, so the non-set value (set value) is guessed or specified to some extent, a considerable number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31, and a considerable number of jackpot lotteries are received. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (ease of receiving the jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently determined. As a result, when the player can guess or specify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the game machine 10 during the game including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the unit jackpot lottery number of times. Since it is possible to determine the ball output performance of the player, it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is large, it is possible to make a decision to continue the game by comprehensively considering the number of times. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is small, it is possible to give up the continuation of the game by comprehensively considering it.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the information for specifying or estimating the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history in the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is a symbol at the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display unit 341 . Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, when the 7-segment display section 39 does not know that the information about the non-setting value is displayed, or when the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 are overlooked, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the display content on the 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player identifies or guesses the non-set value in the ending based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, recognizes or guesses the set value, and advances the game. can enjoy.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display history of the 7-segment display portion 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is being executed, a predetermined operation of the gaming machine 10 by the player causes the display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 to display the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. It is conceivable to display Thus, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display section 39 on the pattern display section 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display can be performed. It is possible to confirm the contents displayed in the section 39 when the contents are forgotten. This makes it possible to specify or guess the non-set value based on the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39 . Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 or the like in the standby state, etc., it is possible to check the past display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 in case the user forgets. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the empty gaming machine 10. can be done. In other words, it becomes possible to specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person, and so-called hyena behavior is permitted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to confirm the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history for the predetermined period is restricted except for the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of specifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on the privilege obtained by others.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, One predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win. In this case, the numbers or alphabets corresponding to the non-set values are displayed in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, and the non-set values are specified in the symbol display portion 341. A ready-to-win effect may be executed. As the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, for example, it is conceivable to stop and display the decoration pattern with the solo number corresponding to the non-set value. Thus, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, and the symbol display portion 341 is non-set. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect that specifies the set value, not only is the lottery result in the big win lottery in the variable game a big win, but also the player can see the first special symbol display part 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, focusing on the numbers stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display portion 363, and focusing on the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 341, the variation game can be enjoyed. In addition, when the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect is executed as one of the ready-to-win effects, in the ready-to-win of the decorative pattern of the numbers corresponding to the set value, the numbers are not aligned in doubles and are stopped and displayed as a misalignment. It is also possible. For example, when the set value is 1, the decorative symbols can be stopped at "222", "333", "444", "555" and "666", but not displayed at "111". The reach when is 1 will always miss. In this way, it is usually desirable that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the number corresponding to the set value, but for example, 5 or 6, which negates the high set value. Since it is desirable not to stop display at the solo eye, it is possible to enjoy the ready-to-win effect from a different point of view than before.

Also, the display of numbers or the like corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, or the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect can be executed only at a specific timing. is also conceivable. By executing the display of numbers corresponding to the non-set value or the non-set value explicit reach effect on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 limited to a specific timing in this way, A game can be enjoyed by paying attention to a variable game executed at a specific timing.

As the specific timing, for example, in the variable game executed in the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 is a big hit. In this way, by specifying or suggesting non-set values in the variable game in the probability variable gaming state or the time saving game state, the high frequency support mode quickly digests the hold, and the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state that tend to become monotonous You can enjoy the variable game in. In addition, it is conceivable to set the specific timing when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range, if the number of variable games to be executed after shifting to the probability variable gaming state is small (eg 1 to 10 times) or large (eg 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more, etc. ). That is, when the jackpot occurs early after shifting to the probability variable gaming state, or when the hooked state occurs with a large number of variable games before reaching the jackpot, the non-set value may be specified or suggested. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a privilege for the early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a remedy for the addiction. In addition, the predetermined number of times range, when the number of variable games to be executed after the transition to the time-saving gaming state is small (eg 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving gaming state (eg 90 times to 100 times) It is conceivable to set In this case, a non-set value is specified or suggested as a privilege for a big win early after the end of the big win game or a big win just before the end of the time saving.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls that satisfy a specific condition (99 game balls entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within the specific period) number), in the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 I explained the case where it is presented to

By the way, as in the above-described first embodiment, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set. set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. In other words, all or part of the specific information is divided and presented a plurality of times in the jackpot series. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple times, the If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game is not stored or recorded, it is impossible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game to be executed first. become difficult. That is, if the specific information presented in the past on the 7-segment display section 39 is not accurately stored or recorded, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), there is the trouble of accurately storing or recording the specific information presented on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past. It is also assumed that the player gives up specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the enjoyment of the game by being able to specify or guess the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a specific period is not set as the predetermined period, but based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period, one Only once, specific information is presented to identify or infer non-set values (set values). As described above, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is used only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. is presented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience caused when the specific information is presented a plurality of times during the predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in this embodiment, the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period. There is no specific information to remember or record. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information that is presented only once for one predetermined period. This eliminates the trouble of accurately storing or recording specific information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest is enhanced.

In one example of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot. , A specific condition is that the game ball is entered into the special out ball mouth of the crew device. Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is set to one predetermined period. On the other hand, it is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 only once after the predetermined period has ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggesting process, the 7-segment display section control process, and the ending addition image control process are different from those in the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggesting process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display section control process executed in FIG. 48, and FIG. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Set value suggestion process]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the set value suggestion process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40 ), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 A process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 for receiving 99 and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 for a predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). . As a result, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the predetermined period is counted at one time.

Further, in the setting value suggesting process of the present embodiment, on the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the game ball retention is performed for a predetermined period. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 staying in the part 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display part control process (step S2502) and the ending addition image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , Based on the flag during the stopper part downward movement set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2203), it is executed on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display section control processing]
The 7-segment display section control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game is started (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display section control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display section control processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order of the 7-segment display control information and the already displayed information (see FIG. 42), the 7-segment display control Reading of only the control order of information is executed (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display section control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display section is displayed only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), there is no need to read the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display section 39 .

[Ending addition image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending addition image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending addition image control process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment described above, but the first Step S2404 at the end of the ending addition image control process in the embodiment is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control processing of the present embodiment is executed with the 5R normal jackpot as a trigger (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 48), until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot Shortly thereafter, the already displayed information storage area is initialized in step S2405.

As described above, in the present embodiment, specific information (number ) is presented in whole or in part. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be memorized or recorded by the player. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information that is presented only once for one predetermined period. This eliminates the trouble of accurately storing or recording specific information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest is enhanced.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or guessed after the elapse of the specified period (the ending of the jackpot game) based on the number of times the specified condition is satisfied during the specified period. The case where all or part of the specific information (numbers) for the purpose is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as the specific information are displayed in a number display order determined when the game machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed. (See FIG. 36). Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where numbers are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed is described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in a number display order (Fig. ), the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is changed. The control order of segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the already presented specific information can be obtained, Unable to obtain new specific information. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, in a single-shot jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions are met in a specific period of time. , there is a concern that interest in specific information presented after the elapse of a specific period of time will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order of presenting the specific information (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order of presenting specific information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. New specific information may be obtained even when there is little Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period of time. It is possible to make the user interested in the specific number of conditions, and to make the user interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game by presenting specific information that can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) according to the number that satisfies a specific condition. Become.

The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order of presenting the specific information include, for example, winning a jackpot, the opening of the jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game. can be considered. By setting a predetermined condition in this manner, the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the order of presentation of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. As a result, for example, the presentation order of the specific information in the jackpot game can be made interesting, so that the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, winning a specific jackpot (for example, a variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), a specific jackpot game (for example, a variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a low probability mode) It is conceivable that the opening of the jackpot game for the jackpot), the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the number of times the specific information presentation order is determined (changed) is reduced compared to the case where the predetermined conditions are not limited to specific jackpots or jackpot games. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information will be presented with respect to the previously presented specific information, it becomes more difficult to specify all non-set values (specify set values). , it is possible to prevent all non-set values from being identified (set values are identified) early. As a result, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Further, the predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific effect is determined or executed as a variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, for example. Typically, the specific effect includes a premium effect in which a jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is fixed among variable game effects. Furthermore, as a specific effect, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 to be stop-displayed or temporarily-stopped-displayed (intermediate stop-displayed). For example, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "777" in the pattern display unit 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-off point such as "767", a specific non-reach-off point such as "367" Temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) can be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is to be executed, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) is performed with the left and right decorative patterns in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7". It is conceivable that a symbol, such as "development", which clearly indicates that a development effect is to be executed, is temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when a predetermined condition is set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that the one-shot jackpot is consecutive multiple times, or that the same specific information presentation order is consecutive multiple times. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed). Therefore, since it becomes easier to obtain new information as the specific information, it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when the new specific information cannot be obtained, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the order of presentation of the specific information determined (changed) may be prioritized with respect to the predetermined condition that is satisfied first. Priority may be given to the presentation order of specific information that is determined (changed) for a predetermined condition that is satisfied.

In one example of the present embodiment, a plurality of non-settings as specific information on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, a first jackpot game is started) The display order of the numbers corresponding to each value and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and according to these display orders, the end of the predetermined period is set. After the passage of time), all or part of the numbers for specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 .

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred by. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on display order setting processing, which is different from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order End the setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is the jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot is the first win and the predetermined period has started. Whether the jackpot in the low-probability mode is, for example, when the jackpot game is started, whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low-probability mode or in the high-probability mode. is included in the jackpot game start command, and when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, based on the probability mode information in the command determination process of FIG. A flag indicating a jackpot in the low-probability mode is set to ON or OFF, and the MPU 51 confirms the flag. In addition, the probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

If the MPU 51 is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the jackpot is the first hit (a jackpot that is the start of a predetermined period), the process proceeds to step S2603. On the other hand, the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process when the jackpot is not in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when the jackpot is in the high probability mode (step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and displays the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the 7 segment display section 39. is determined (step S2604), the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

Here, the display order of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is the same as in step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. Also, the determined display order of numbers is stored in the RAM 512 .

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders of the segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. The probabilities are set to be the same. The control order of the segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders in the same order for each number by the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. be. Also, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512 .

In this embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all the numbers. can be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined for each predetermined period. As a result, the order of presenting the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined, so that the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. New specific information may be obtained even if the number is small. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period of time. It is possible to make the user interested in the specific number of conditions, and to make the user interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. As a result, by presenting the specific information according to the number of times that a specific condition for specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is satisfied, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values after a specific period (ending of a jackpot game) A case has been described in which all or part of the information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 ends when the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed for a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has passed).

By the way, when the player misses or forgets the presentation of the specific information in the specified period, the player may use the specific It is assumed that they wish to reconfirm the information. Also, when the player changes, it is assumed that the player after the change wishes to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the prescribed period, the specific information is not presented outside the prescribed period, so the specific information cannot be reconfirmed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period. Thus, the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period can be presented, so that the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past during the special period. In other words, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when the specific information is overlooked or forgotten during the specified period, and when the player changes, the game can be played after the change. The player can confirm the specific information presented to the past players. As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the player in the past. Convenience for specifying or inferring is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a waiting state (customer waiting state) period in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is the standby period, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past while the game is not being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of visual recognition of various effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game effects and jackpot game effects.

In addition, if it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state, predetermined input such as password input operation and command input operation on the specific display screen that can be changed in the standby state It is also conceivable to make it a condition to perform an operation. Passwords and commands may be made available by displaying them on the symbol display section 341 in the ending or the like in a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands can be obtained by displaying a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 in the jackpot game, and reading the matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like using a portable terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. It may be enabled by so-called mobile interlocking, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state can be presented, Only players who can enter passwords, commands, etc., i.e., only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, confirm all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior or free riding, in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by other players.

In addition, all or part of the specific information presented on the mobile terminal in the past by reading the matrix type two-dimensional code etc. It is also conceivable to present the

Also, it is conceivable to set the special period during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening/closing execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented in a state in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not specified or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the indication or suggestion of the result of the big winning lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. In addition, since the jackpot game is executed after the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated by the variable game, the interest of the player tends to decrease. By presenting the specified information, interest in the jackpot game is enhanced.

Moreover, as a special period, setting during a variable game is also conceivable. Here, in the total time during which the game is executed (the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on minus the standby time), as a theoretical value, the variation game is compared to the execution time of the jackpot variation game. has a longer execution time. Therefore, by enabling presentation of past specific information during a variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when setting the special period during the variable game, during a certain period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where the reach effect is not executed as a variable game effect or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent visual recognition of the indication or suggestion of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the stationary display of the decoration pattern.

Further, the presentation of the past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it is possible to present the past specific information at a timing not expected by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a playability with unexpectedness. In addition, since the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the gaming machine 10, even a player with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can , it becomes possible to know specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Here, examples of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the game machine 10 include, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in the standby state, To present the specific information presented in the past before the reach production is executed at a certain rate (including 100%) when a specific reach production is scheduled to be executed in the variable game or For example, it is decided to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the jackpot game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in the standby state, the player considers the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen and operates the gaming machine for executing the game from an empty platform. 10 can be selected, the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the gaming machine 10 for executing the game are improved. In addition, if the specific information presented in the past is presented before the reach production is executed when a specific reach production is scheduled to be executed in the variable game, the presentation of the past specific information Interest in the variation game is improved because it plays a role as a pre-notice performance for execution of the specific ready-to-win performance. In addition, the presentation of past specific information in variable games is expected to suggest the degree of expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (including a confirmed production indicating that it is a jackpot), It is also conceivable to execute it as a chance-up effect for improving the degree of expectation (reliability). Also in this case, interest in the variation game is improved. Further, when specific information presented in the past is presented by a lottery executed at a specific timing of a variable game or a jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at a random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to particularly impart surprise to the game. In addition, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing. is improved.

On the other hand, when the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the intention of the player, the special In the case of the period, the player can positively check the past specific information at his/her favorite timing. Therefore, when specifying or estimating a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of past specific information, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the timing of presenting the past specific information and reflects one's own intentions. convenience is improved.

Here, as an example in which the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the intention of the player, the operation button 20 For example, when a predetermined operation is performed, specific information that has been presented in the past can be presented.

In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed at the ending (specified period) of the jackpot game, and the standby state is displayed. During the period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the ending of the last three jackpot games It is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without performing input operations such as passwords and commands. is.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11 .

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts the player's pressing operation in the standby state described later and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) of the symbol display unit 341 . The selection decision unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision buttons 21B.

A plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the standby state screen transition processing of FIGS. 61 and 62, which will be described later. (see FIG. 60) and includes an upper selection button 211 , a lower selection button 212 , a left selection button 213 and a right selection button 214 . Here, provisional selection means a state in which the content of the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. These selection buttons 211 to 214 are, as shown in FIG. 54, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch for switching input signals to the sound lamp control device 5. 211d. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5 . Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated, it is determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 are being operated continuously or the operation has ended. .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Also, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts the player's operations on the touch keys may be provided as operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the pattern display section 341 for accepting player's operations. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Also, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches or the like, but they may be, for example, piezoelectric elements as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player. .

Here, FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment, an operation detection process ( Step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B have been operated. Here, FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection process (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), selection button operation detection process (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination, Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the game machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined. Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Also, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, as the operation history of the operation button 20, the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals are set to the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process in step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag is determined. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38A). Also, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38A). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38A). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 38A). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 59A is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation states for the operation button 20. FIG. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the process proceeds. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3003. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004, and when the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5. . Accordingly, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 continues, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of time. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 has been continuously operated. can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not ON (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is ON. It judges (step S3005). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)), and the detected operation pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines that the second operation detection flag is not on in step S3002 (step S3002: No), it determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG. 57, the "operation detection flag" can be replaced with the "down selection operation detection flag".

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes up selection operation detection pattern determination process, down selection operation detection pattern determination process, left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the up-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 detects an up-selection operation history from the operation history of the up-selection button 211 determined based on the first up-selection operation detection flag, the second up-selection operation detection flag, and the third up-selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" is the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the bottom selection button from the operation history of the bottom selection button 212 determined based on the first bottom selection operation detection flag, the second bottom selection operation detection flag, and the bottom selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "down selection operation detection flag", and the "operation pattern flag" is changed to the "down selection operation pattern". You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" is set as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first bottom selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). used.

The MPU 41 also sets the first to third bottom selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "left selection operation detection flag", You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 has three operation states of "ON", "ON", and "ON". When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). used.

The MPU 41 also sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). used.

The MPU 41 also sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the enter button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "enter button operation detection flag".

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the determination button 21B based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. to set an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the enter button 21B. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58 should be replaced with the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" has occurred as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. , the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first decision operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B is being operated.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the enter button 21B has ended). .

Further, the MPU 41 sets all the first to third determination operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the enter button 21B is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Waiting state screen transition processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition processing executed in 2702 of the secondary timer interrupt processing, in the standby state where neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the determination In accordance with the operation of the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is changed, and processing is executed to allow the player to make various selections and settings. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pattern display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the variable display of the decoration design is stopped, the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are "0", and when the transition to the jackpot game state does not occur, the variation of the decoration design is stopped. A change-of-state stop screen is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and cursor images.

The plurality of screen transition images are images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transition destination). A plurality of screen transition images are a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen displayed as "7-segment display history", and a character selection displayed as "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displaying "character customization", and a change stop screen displaying "return" Includes a floating still screen transition image.

The cursor image is an image indicating which of the plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected. This item is provisionally selected. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that "7-segment display history" is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the other screen transition images in order to emphasize the provisional selection. . Note that the temporary selection item can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 .

On the top menu screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the determination button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. is transferred to

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the content of the specific information displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for one of the three most recent predetermined periods. , a second previous history screen on which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period two times before is displayed, and a three previous history screen on which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period three times before is displayed. Each history screen is a history image in the same form as the additional image (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C)) displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game. including. The history image shows the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period. Contains value-suggestion images. In the example shown in FIG. 60, by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the segments A to It shows that C has a history of being lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display section history selection screen has a cursor image indicating that it is temporarily selected, and a previous history screen for shifting to the previous history screen displaying "History 1 (previous)". Transition image, 2 times before displaying "History 2 (2 times before)" 2 times before history screen transition image, 3 times before displaying "History 3 (3 times before)" It includes a history screen transition image three times before for transitioning to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displaying "end". Then, on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the player temporarily selects the previous history screen transition image of "History 1 (previous)" and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display portion history selection screen to the previous history screen transition image. Moves to the previous history screen. Further, when "History 2 (2 times before)" is selected, the 7-segment display portion history selection screen is shifted to the 2nd time previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 times before)" is selected, is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen. When "end" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is switched to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to switch from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any one of the 1st previous history screen, the 2nd previous history screen, and the 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the history information desired by the player by shifting to the history screen desired by the player. As a result, the history can be effectively confirmed while avoiding confirmation of history information such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that history confirmation can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, which is different from the pattern display section 341 in which the decorative patterns are variably displayed. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, visual recognition of the image effect executed in the pattern display section 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, the same history information as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending is displayed on the pattern display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39 . Here, since the pattern display portion 341 generally has a large display area, displaying the history information on the pattern display portion 341 improves the visibility of the history information. Also, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, if the contents displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending are displayed on the pattern display section 341, it becomes possible to confirm the history information by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of confirming history information is improved.

In this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also conceivable to display a plurality of pieces of history information simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, it is possible to efficiently check the presentation contents in this case as well.

Also, in the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of "character selection" is selected, the display screen is transitioned to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "character customization" is selected, it is displayed. The screen shifts to the character customization screen. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variable game effect or the like, and to customize the character's costume, accessories, hairstyle, and the like.

In the top menu screen, when the change stop screen transition image of "return" is selected, the display screen shifts to the change stop screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) in the standby state, it is possible to confirm the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods. can be done. Therefore, when the player overlooks or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 in the past. In the case of a change, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. - 特許庁As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, so that the non-set values (set values) can be Convenience for specifying or inferring is improved.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 61 and 62, the procedure of the waiting state screen transition processing executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55 will be described.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the waiting state screen transition processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the device is in the waiting state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to OFF (step S3101: No) during the variable game production flag that is set to ON at step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. If the flag during the jackpot game production is set to ON when transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game production process of step S2004 (step S3102: No), in the standby state judge there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in a standby state when the variable game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes) I judge.

Then, if the MPU 51 is in the standby state (both steps S3101 and S3102 are No), the process proceeds to step S3103, and if it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), the standby state screen transition processing ends. .

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the pattern display section 341 is the fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is set when shifting from the fluctuation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to off in the standby state, FIG. is set to ON in step S3120. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is shifted to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109 of FIG. is shifted from the previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen, in the second previous history screen process in step S3115, the display screen is transferred from the second previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen, and in step S3117 It is also set to ON when the display screen shifts from the 3rd previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the 3rd previous history screen process. Incidentally, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started.

Then, if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for various selections and settings (step S3105) (FIG. 60). reference). That is, when the operation button 20 is operated while the display screen is the variable display screen, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), and sets off the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to on. (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109, and when the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the process proceeds to step The process proceeds to S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, an item to be provisionally selected is changed according to the operation of the selection button 21A. Further, in the top menu screen processing, when the decision button 21B is operated, the screen corresponding to the item temporarily selected, specifically, the fluctuation stop screen, the 7-segment display section history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character Move the display screen to the customization screen. Further, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transition destination screen to ON and sets the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to on. (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to be OFF (step S3110: No), The process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. The details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3112>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. be. Then, if the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the process proceeds to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 turns off the previous history screen flag and turns on the 7-segment history selection screen flag.

<Step S3114>
If the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The 2-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2-time previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. be. Then, if the two previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115, and if the two previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the process proceeds to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2nd previous history screen process, and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 2nd previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 2nd previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3-time previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. be. Then, if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117, and if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the process proceeds to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process, and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
When the history screen flag three times before is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON. (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. That is, when all the screen flags are off in the standby state, the MPU 51 is shifted from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, and can determine that the display screen is the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition processing, the display screen is changed to the 7-segment display history in accordance with the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B). A process of shifting from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the second previous history screen, or the third previous history screen is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and the upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. It is set to ON in the pattern determination process. If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202, and if the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs processing to change the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Run. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second top selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time before)". (See FIG. 60). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (previous)" displayed at the top of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display is not changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation of the upper selection button 211 has not started, the MPU 51 determines that the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3203). The second bottom selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the bottom selection button 212 has started, and the bottom selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. It is set to ON in the pattern determination process. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204, and if the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs processing to change the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. to run. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times before)". (See FIG. 60). Note that if the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the option The provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (previous)" displayed at the top of the images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second bottom selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second enter operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the enter button 21B has been operated, and is set to ON in the enter button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. be. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and provisionally selects when the determination button 21B is operated. It is determined whether or not the displayed item is "end" (step S3207). If the provisionally selected item is "end" when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3208, and if the enter button 21B is operated, provisionally If the selected item is not "end" (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the provisionally selected item is "end" when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing.

<Step S3210>
If the provisionally selected item is not "end" when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (previous)". (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is “history 1 (1 time before)” (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211, and the provisionally selected item is “history 1 (1 time)”. before)” (step S3210: No), the process proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3212), and the 7-segment history selection screen processing ends.

<Step S3213>
If the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item provisionally selected is "history 2 (2 It is determined whether or not it is "previous time)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is "history 2 (2 times before)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214, and the provisionally selected item is "history 2 (twice before)” (step S3213: No), the process proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "history 2 (2 times before)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2 times previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), the two-time previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3215), and the 7-segment history selection screen processing ends.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "history 2 (2 times before)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item provisionally selected is "history 3 (3 The display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), and the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON. (step S3217), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

Thus, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, the 2nd previous history screen, and the 3rd previous history screen. corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 for the past three predetermined periods. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. In the case of a change, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. - 特許庁As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, so that the non-set values (set values) can be Convenience for specifying or inferring is improved.

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen , 2nd previous history screen and 3rd previous history screen) are not shifted to other screens such as the fluctuation stop screen. Therefore, the player stops launching the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subject to time constraints such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. Thus, the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past can be checked carefully and politely at one's own pace. As a result, when a player specifies or guesses a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, the player can consider the multiple non-set values (set values) at his or her own pace. setting value) is improved.

In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the operation (intention) of the player in the standby state is the past three predetermined periods of time. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, the specific information for the past one, two, or four or more predetermined periods may be confirmed.

Further, the display of past specific information is not limited to the pattern display section 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, or a display section different from the pattern display section 341 or the 7-segment display section 39, for example, a separate display for displaying the past specific information. It may be a display unit. In addition, if there is a display section provided for executing a part of the effects such as variable game effects separately from the symbol display section 341, it is also possible to display past information on the display section. Conceivable.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to third embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, after the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated upon completion of the jackpot game. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the specific information is displayed during the specified period set after the specified period elapses each time the specified period set as the specified period elapses.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers to be displayed (non-set values) are displayed. set value) can be specified. Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are to be controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off. , the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When segment B, which is the second object to be controlled, is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, "5" and " 6” can be determined. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" are the segment, which is the fifth control target. The numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is lit or extinguished.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the next display will not be displayed until after all the segments A to G are controlled. The control of segments A to G for displaying the target number is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G become control targets, the next number to be displayed starts to be displayed. Until then, information is displayed on the 7-segment display 39 to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be displayed next after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player is displayed on the 7 segment display section 39. During the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, there is concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game passes, so that each of the plurality of non-set values All or part of the numbers (specific information) to be displayed are put out every time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed during the specific period that has passed earlier, it is assumed that the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or guess the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display section) having a plurality of information display sections (six individual lamp sections) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display section The information (number) specifying the non-setting value is displayed by . Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lit state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (extinction state) in which no specific information is presented. The non-set value can be specified by the specified information displayed on the information display section. By thus setting the information display section to one of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display section in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, as the specific information, only information that allows the non-set value to be specified is displayed, and information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, and unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to

The non-set value display means is not particularly limited. Matrix displays, plasma displays, and the like are included. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means for displaying the decoration pattern in a variable manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed, and until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed, at least the specific period , the information display portion that was brought into the display state first is brought into the display state. For example, the information display portion that was put into the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also put into the display state during the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display section that was in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that at least during the specific period in the predetermined period You can check it though. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and by extension, when specifying or estimating the set value. performance is improved.

It should be noted that the information display portion that is in the display state during the specific period may be maintained in the display state at all times until the end of the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period of the jackpot game, or may be maintained only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

In one example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp display units with any number from 1 to 6, a game ball enters a special out ball opening of a crew device during a specific period. Individual lamp display with numbers corresponding to non-set values attached at the stage of winning the lamp lighting lottery without waiting for the elapse of a specific period by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed with the opportunity of being set. part is turned on. Then, during the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modifications of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Reference numeral 66 is a diagram showing an example of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display section 35. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharging section 38A instead of the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above. A lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 in place of the 7-segment display section 39 in the embodiment.

The special out ball discharge section 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 to the back side of the game board 31 . This special out ball discharge portion 38A has a configuration in which the stopper portion 383 is omitted from the game ball retention portion 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the game ball retention portion 38A is similar to the game ball retention portion 38A except that the stopper portion 383 is omitted. It has the same configuration as In such a special out ball discharge section 38A, the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying (stopped) in the special out ball discharge section 38A. be done. Therefore, the gaming ball 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the specific period has passed as in the first embodiment, but is detected during the specific period. However, it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 each time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 .

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that specifies the non-set value, and has a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. including. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in rows (linearly) in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 65 , the lamp display section 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 . As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 can be turned on and off individually.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp portion 351, and when the first individual lamp portion 351 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 1, and the set value is the game set value. 1 is negated. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp portion 352, and when the second individual lamp portion 352 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2, and the set value is the game set value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp portion 353, and when the third individual lamp portion 353 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3, and the set value is the game set value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp portion 354, and when the fourth individual lamp portion 354 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4, and the set value is the game set value. 4 is denied. A number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp portion 355, and when the fifth individual lamp portion 355 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5, and the set value is the game set value. 5 is denied. The number 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp portion 356, and when the sixth individual lamp portion 356 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 6, and the set value is the game set value. 6 is negated.

That is, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set values corresponding to the numbers are negated as set values. be. When the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. A number corresponding to one of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356, which is the state, corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is extinguished, the non-set value is 2 to 6 and the set value of 1 is specified. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are lit and only the second individual section lamp 352 is extinguished, the non-set value is 1, 3 to 6, and a set value of 2 is specified. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 352, 354 to 356 are lit and only the third individual section lamp 353 is extinguished, It specifies that the settings are 1, 2, 4-6, and that the setting is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth and sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 353, 355 and 356 are lit and only the fourth individual lamp portion 354 is extinguished, The setting values are 1-3, 5, 6, and the setting value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 354 and 356 are lit and only the fifth individual lamp section 355 is extinguished, the non-set value is 1 to 4, 6, and a set value of 5 is specified. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is extinguished, the non-set value is 1 to 5, and the set value is 1 to 5. A value of 6 is specified. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are controlled in the set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Set value suggestion process]
In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356). The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value by the lit state or the extinguished state of the . Here, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the set value suggesting process executed in the secondary timer interrupt process of FIG. In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356). The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value by the lit state or the extinguished state of the . The procedure for setting value suggestion processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the process proceeds to step S3311. transition to

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), Terminate value suggestion processing.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S3302: Yes), that is, if it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are turned on. A lottery for lamp lighting is performed to determine whether or not to light the lamp. That is, each time the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are to be lit.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed. This makes the setting value recognizable. In the 7-segment display section 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control each of the 7 segments A to G 5 times. ) above must be established. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. and extinguished state. Therefore, in order to display five non-set values by the lamp display unit 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition needs to be satisfied five times or more. Further, in this embodiment, a crew device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment is employed. Therefore, if specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying non-set values are It is obvious that it will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual ramp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 , on the condition that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the degree of difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily identified. That is, the setting value is prevented from being easily recognized.

The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356. In the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers. It is set to be the same or substantially the same as the difficulty level for In addition, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or may be the same winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351-356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356, a game feature is imparted in which the probability of lighting the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values is stabilized. be. When the same winning probability is set for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). be done. This is because, in the above-described first embodiment, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display section 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37. This is because in this embodiment as well, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373, about one individual lamp portion 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, when the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less. Can be changed.

In addition, the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a special If the game ball 99 entering the out ball 373 is a different lottery condition, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the degree of difficulty in fulfilling this lottery condition. That is, it is conceivable to set the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery low when the difficulty of fulfilling the lottery condition is low, and set the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery high as the difficulty of fulfilling the lottery condition increases. be done. By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the degree of difficulty in fulfilling the lottery conditions in this way, the degree of difficulty in fulfilling the specific conditions necessary for lighting one of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 can be specified. can be equalized regardless of the type of conditions. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (exactly as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is made different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values are turned on varies. gender is given. When the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 having a later control order may be set to have a lower winning probability. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having the earliest control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 wins the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery does not win (step S3304: No), the set value process ends. .

<Step S3305>
If the lottery for lighting the lamp is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the already lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already lit lamp information is information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are being lit, and includes already lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The already lit lamp flag information includes a first already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , a third lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section It consists of a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp portion 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and is set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, all lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to OFF, and the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, indicating that the first, third to sixth individual lamp portions 351, 353 to 356 are extinguished.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying non-set values are lit. Then, when all the lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggesting process. That is, when all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying non-set values are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be lit, so the set value suggesting process ends. On the other hand, if there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by a procedure similar to the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the set values stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the set values are changed. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. good. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp portion 351, and similarly, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above. Numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp portions 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the set value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is the second individual lamp unit 352→the third individual lamp unit 352. The order is the lamp portion 353 →fourth individual lamp portion 354 →fifth individual lamp portion 355 →sixth individual lamp portion 356 . Further, in the numeric display order determination table of the first embodiment, the probability of selecting each display order is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table of the present embodiment as well, each lamp control order is selected. are equally probable.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period of time starts. Also, the lamp control orders need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308). The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are lit. Specific information is presented indicating non-set values. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already lit lamp information (step S3310), and terminates the set value suggesting process. For example, when the already lit lamp information indicates that all the already lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. As shown in 68(C), the second lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp portion 352 is set to ON.

Thus, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting lottery is executed each time the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp unit 351- A non-set value can be specified by lighting 356 . That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be identified by turning on the individual lamps 351 to 356 even before the specific period elapses. By setting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in one of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state in this way, the non-set value can be specified by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. be. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to

<Step S3311>
If the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3311: No), the set value Terminate the suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type to end is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the setting value suggestion process is performed. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51, among the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, if there is an individual lamp portion 351 to 356 that is lit, that The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are extinguished (step S3313), the already lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the set value suggesting process ends. That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are extinguished when the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are kept lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on at any time, that is, the specific information specifying the non-set value. . Therefore, the previously presented specific information in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and when specifying or estimating the set value. be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, it corresponds to the non-set value in the lamp display unit 35. Although the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on, it is optional to perform the lamp lighting lottery. When the ball 99 is entered, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by sorting into routes detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and routes not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 that present the non-set values are set to either of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state, and the individual lamp portion 351 in the lit state Information specifying the non-set value is presented by a type (number) of .about.356. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, and unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to

In addition, the lighted individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are immediately lighted by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, The lit individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are kept lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information for specifying the non-set value is confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit. be able to. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and by extension, when specifying or estimating the set value. performance is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual ramp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 , on the condition that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted according to the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the degree of difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily specified. That is, the setting value is prevented from being easily recognized.

In addition, it will be lit immediately by winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be indicated to the player on display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the execution of the lamp lighting lottery (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37) is clearly indicated to the player. As shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly indicated to the player, and the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information about is clearly displayed in the pattern display section 341 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are lit. An image is displayed to draw attention to the possibility, that is, the lamp display section 35 (roulette). In this way, the design display unit 341 clearly indicates that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373), so that the game ball 99 is placed in the special out ball 373. Even if the player misses that the ball is entered, the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 also indicates that the game ball 99 has been entered into the special out ball opening 373, that is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the light will be turned on.

Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69(B1), information regarding the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 to be turned on is clearly displayed. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp portion 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display part 341, not only the lamp display part 35 but also the pattern display part 341 can grasp whether or not the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit. Convenience is improved because it becomes possible to

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display section 341, during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening/closing execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 being lit is continuously displayed. be done. That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the individual lamp portion 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display portion 341 . It should be noted that, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the open/close execution mode), information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit may be displayed. .

On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, an image is displayed clearly indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, as shown in FIG. 69(B1). In this way, during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening/closing execution mode), the symbol display section 341 continuously displays information about the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are being lit, so that the lamp display section 35 is displayed. The lighting of the individual lamps 351 to 356 can be confirmed in the pattern display section 341 as well, without the need for confirmation, thereby improving convenience.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display section 341 instead of the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the pattern display section 341 . In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect in the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an ending addition image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending effect of the jackpot game. . For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of the jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display portion 35 is displayed in the symbol display portion 341 as the ending additional image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the lit/unlit state of the lamp display portion 35 by the symbol display portion 341 at the ending of the big win game, the lit/unlit state of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 lit up to the big win game can be confirmed. Therefore, convenience is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lamp display portion 35 is formed by arranging the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 in rows (lines). are not limited to being arranged in a row, but other forms can also be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a lamp display section 35 in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring, and as shown in FIG. can also Further, the lamp display portion 35 may be one in which the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, or the like may be employed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to understand the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means for a prescribed period. be. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. be. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized in that

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The game machine according to appendix A1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2 or appendix A3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A4]
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2 or appendix A3, wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information in part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the special information is displayed by part of the plurality of display areas of the display means for displaying the specific information. That is, the special information display area is shared with the specific information display area. As a result, since the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display such as, for example, a 7-segment display. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with display means for displaying specific information and special information, while suppressing complication of the configuration of the game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6]
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the specific information and the special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in specifying or estimating the specific numerical information or the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the specific information and the special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A7, wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, and the predetermined period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is the transition determination. It is set for a period of time that suggests or specifies results. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when the image display means displays the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the transition determination result, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase the interest in suggesting or specifying the result of transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through the specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10]
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
Said discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313-316) to the back side of said game board (31); a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix A10, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A10 to A12, specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of the game ball through the second discharge port into which the game ball can enter in the special game. Display content is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows passage of a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning port in the special game passes, and a specific condition is established, the display means displays The content of the displayed specific information is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game ball entering the second discharge port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine for the reason that a difference in skill may occur. prevented.

[Appendix A14]
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. Playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3 characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. . By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
Supplementary note A15, characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A16, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix A17]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A15 or appendix A16, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix A19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix A18, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and can guess or predict the specific numerical information and, in turn, the predetermined numerical information. The benefit of being easier to identify can be obtained.

[Appendix A20]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18 or appendix A19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the specified period is set during the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A21, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during the prescribed period set during the execution period of the special game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or specifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (specified period). The amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22]
The special game includes a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed. have
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23]
The display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A21 or appendix A22, wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23, when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix A24]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A23, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, the start of the predetermined period is set to a special game that is executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. be done. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can check a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period. The convenience of specifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Supplementary note A23 or Supplementary note A24, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. The gaming machine described in .

The gaming machine pertaining to appendix A25 includes a specific period set for a special game to be started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, each time the specific period elapses, the specified Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means. can be improved.

[Appendix A26]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, after the value-added game is terminated Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A27]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A26, wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27, the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not) is determined. ) can be focused on and enjoy the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when the specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, characterized in that the is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, when the specific condition is satisfied within the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. can. It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period of time, it is possible to expect that many specific conditions will be satisfied in a predetermined period of time. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A gaming machine described in A29.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to appendix A30, wherein the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A31, each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information. becomes possible. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32]
The gaming machine according to appendix A30 or appendix A31, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to appendix A30 or appendix A31, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A33, since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34, the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29 to A34, wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to identify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can simply enjoy guessing.

[Appendix A36]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29, characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36, the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A36, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37, the individual display section is controlled to be in one of two modes, the display state and the non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to appendix A36 or appendix A37, wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix or staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36 to A38, wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the game machines according to appendices A38 and A39, it is possible to form the information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40]
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
further comprising
The display control means (51) controls the display means ( 35, 39, 341) to display the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A41, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information upon turning on the power of the game machine. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by the start of the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44]
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46]
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) in a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period an operation means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) to display a second display control means (51);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if the player forgets the display contents, or if there is a change of player, etc., the player should check the display contents during the special period. can be done. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess. It becomes possible to determine whether

[Appendix A47]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46, wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A47, the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A46 or appendix A47, wherein at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49]
The display content display control means (51) allows the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The game machine according to appendix A48, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendices A48 to A50, it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46 to A50, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51, wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decoration pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machine according to appendix A51 and appendix A52 includes a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period, and different display means for each period of the specified period and the special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as a variable display image display means for displaying symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display contents of the specific information during the prescribed period are presented by the variable display image display means, the display contents of the specific information during the prescribed period can be variably displayed by the operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. It is possible to make the image display means present. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix A53]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix A53, characterized in that the display is made on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix A54 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix A55]
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to appendix A53, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof make it easier to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of the plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A56]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A55, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to appendix A56, wherein the plurality of display orders includes display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selecting means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57, it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easy to specify the specific non-set values, and conversely, it is difficult to specify the specific non-set values. is also possible. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix A58]
The display order of the plurality of pieces of display is a first display with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of pieces of specific information. including order,
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58, a first display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of determining the advantage most disadvantageous to the player and the The possibility of favorable decision probability is left. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that it is possible to suppress the early termination of the game on the gaming machine, thereby increasing the operation rate of the gaming machine. Decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59]
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability with the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information; and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability with the highest probability,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59, the second display order with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is easy to be selected. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix A58, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game on the gaming machine may be terminated early. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation rate of the game machine. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, the advantages for the player are contradictory due to the low priority of the two specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two advantageous determination probabilities is obtained, it is possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous decision probability. a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability lower than the probability;
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. By setting the selection rate of the third display order to be high, the player is informed of the possibility that the probability of advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous decision immediately before grasping the probability of first advantageous decision. can be expected. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix A61]
The plurality of display orders are such that the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous decision probability. including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability. The selectivity of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. The specific information to be displayed is left as non-display specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), when the set value is grasped pleasure is enhanced.

[Appendix A62]
Additional notes A1 to A3, further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62, display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A62, wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A63, display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during the standby state period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and specify or guess the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining the specific information for the purpose.

[Appendix A64]
The display restricting means (51) restricts display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A62 or appendix A63.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, other players take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and specify the specific numerical information based on the display history. Or it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for guessing.

[Appendix A65]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. and displaying the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition holds 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when a second specific condition is satisfied. Information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A66]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine of Appendix A65, comprising being stored in a .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value is stored in the numerical information storage means. Including information stored. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to appendix A65 or appendix A66, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof make it easier to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of the plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A68]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Annex A69]
Further comprising second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A69, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means ( 45), predetermined information is displayed. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to the player during a prescribed period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, the predetermined numerical value can be displayed to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. As a result, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical value information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70]
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The game machine according to appendix A69, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A70, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. is displayed on the second display means provided in the Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix A70, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the game machine according to Appendix A71, the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. can be confirmed on the gaming hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72]
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70 or appendix A71, wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A72, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed are selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed to the player by the second display means. can be reliably prevented from being grasped by

[Appendix B1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341);
with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that

[Appendix B3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The game machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2 or appendix B3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B4]
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5]
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
Said discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313-316) to the back side of said game board (31); a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix B4, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6]
The gaming machine according to appendix B5, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4 to appendix B6, specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of the game ball through the second discharge port into which the game ball can enter in the special game. Display content is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B6, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of passing game balls that have passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B7, when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that entered the variable winning port in the special game passes, and a specific condition is established, the display means displays The content of the displayed specific information is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game ball entering the second discharge port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine for the reason that a difference in skill may occur. prevented.

[Appendix B8]
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. Playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B8, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix B9, characterized in that the display is made on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10, when the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix B10 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix C1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied, within a predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying on display means (35, 39, 341) specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, guessing or specifying the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that it can be displayed on means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3]
The display control means (51) outputs the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2 or appendix C3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C4]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
Supplementary note C1 to Supplementary note C3 characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C4, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix C6, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and can guess or predict the specific numerical information and, in turn, the predetermined numerical information. The benefit of being easier to identify can be obtained.

[Appendix C8]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6 or appendix C7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix C8, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C8, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix C9, characterized in that the display is made on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10, when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix C10 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix D1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341);
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The gaming machine, wherein the prescribed period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during the specified period set during the execution period of the special game when the specified condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or specifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (specified period). The amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine according to appendix D1, characterized in that it can be displayed on means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3]
The display control means (51) outputs the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine according to appendix D1, characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2 or appendix D3, not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix D4]
The special game includes a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed. have
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5]
The display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix D6]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix D5, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a special game that is executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. be done. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period. The convenience of specifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Appendix D5 or Appendix D6, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in .

The gaming machine according to appendix D7 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, each time the specific period elapses, the specified Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means. can be improved.

[Appendix D8]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, after the value-added game is terminated Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D9]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9, the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not) is determined. ) can be focused on and enjoy the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D9, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix D10, characterized in that the display is made on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11, when the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix D11 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix E1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types of numerical information are generated during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. display control means (51) for displaying on display means (35, 39, 341) specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when the specific conditions are satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. . It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period, the number of specific conditions that are satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions are satisfied during the predetermined period You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to.

[Appendix E2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that:

[Appendix E3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2 or appendix E3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix E4]
The game according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information. becomes possible. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5 or appendix E6, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5 or appendix E6, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E9]
E8, wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination is variably displayed. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9, the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5 to E9, wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to identify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can simply enjoy guessing.

[Appendix E11]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix E4, wherein the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11, the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12, the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11 or appendix E12, wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix or zigzag.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11 to E13, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the game machines according to appendices E13 and E14, it is possible to form the information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E14, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. . By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits, so that the specific numerical information and, by extension, the predetermined numerical information can be guessed or specified for each first hit. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix E17]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15 or appendix E16, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15 to E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E18, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. A gaming machine according to Appendix E18, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the first win shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game that ends in the consecutive game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the second special game state is entered, the more the predetermined period. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that specific conditions will be met is higher for each consecutive villa than for one shot, and for each consecutive villa, the higher the number of times that specific conditions are met, the higher the possibility that the number of times that specific conditions will be met will increase. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information for specifying the specific numerical information, and thus obtains the specific numerical information and the predetermined numerical information. can benefit from being easier to guess or identify.

[Appendix E20]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18 or appendix E19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E20, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix E21, characterized in that the game machine is displayed on the .

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22, when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix E22 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value, such as the maximum set value, in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix F1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information (non-set value ) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
with
The display control means (51) controls the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that:

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2 or appendix F3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information upon turning on the power of the game machine. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the predetermined period starts. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, when the special game is started, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9]
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
further comprising
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F8, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof make it easier to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of the plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix F10]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period in accordance with a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F10, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. . By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
Supplementary note F11, characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits, so that the specific numerical information and, by extension, the predetermined numerical information can be guessed or specified for each first hit. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix F13]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11 or appendix F12, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F13, the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11 to F13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix F15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix F14, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and can guess or predict the specific numerical information and, in turn, the predetermined numerical information. The benefit of being easier to identify can be obtained.

[Appendix F16]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14 or appendix F15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F16, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17, a plurality of items of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix F17, characterized in that the display is made on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18, when the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix F18 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix G1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. First display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) in a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period an operation means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) to display a second display control means (51);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if the player forgets the display contents, or if there is a change of player, etc., the player should check the display contents during the special period. can be done. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess. It becomes possible to determine whether

[Appendix G2]
The display control means (51) can cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1, characterized in that

[Appendix G3]
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1, characterized in that it is possible to

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2 or appendix G3, the first display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. . Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred based on special information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix G4]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed in the prescribed period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G4, characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G6]
The display content display control means (51) allows the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The game machine according to appendix G5, wherein the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed.

[Appendix G7]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to notes G5 to G7, it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G7, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9]
The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machines according to appendices G8 and G9 are provided with a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as a variable display image display means for displaying symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display contents of the specific information during the prescribed period are presented by the variable display image display means, the display contents of the specific information during the prescribed period can be variably displayed by the operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. It is possible to make the image display means present. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix G10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G9, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix G10, characterized in that the display is made on the .

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix G11 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix H1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least a plurality of specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information (non display control means (51) for displaying a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a set value) in a distinguishable manner on display means (35, 39, 341);
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1, characterized in that:

[Appendix H3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The game machine according to appendix H1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2 or appendix H3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix H4]
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H3, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof make it easier to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of the plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix H5]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period in accordance with a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to appendix H5, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easy to specify the specific non-set values, and conversely, it is difficult to specify the specific non-set values. is also possible. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix H7]
The display order of the plurality of pieces of display is a first display with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of pieces of specific information. including order,
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order. The game machine according to appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, a first display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of determining the advantage most disadvantageous to the player and the The possibility of favorable decision probability is left. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that it is possible to suppress the early termination of the game on the gaming machine, thereby increasing the operation rate of the gaming machine. Decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8]
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability with the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information; and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability with the highest probability,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order. The game machine according to appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the second display order. easy to be selected. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix H6, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation rate of the game machine. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, the advantages for the player are contradictory due to the low priority of the two specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two advantageous determination probabilities is obtained, it is possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous decision probability. a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability lower than the probability;
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The game machine according to appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. By setting the selection rate of the third display order to be high, the player is informed of the possibility that the probability of advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous decision immediately before grasping the probability of first advantageous decision. can be expected. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix H10]
The plurality of display orders are such that the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous decision probability. including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous decision probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The game machine according to appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability. The selectivity of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. The specific information to be displayed is left as non-display specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), when the set value is grasped pleasure is enhanced.

[Appendix H11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H10, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. . By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game state. It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix H13]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H11 or appendix H12, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix H15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix H14, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to note H15, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and can guess or predict the specific numerical information and, in turn, the predetermined numerical information. The benefit of being easier to identify can be obtained.

[Appendix H16]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14 or appendix H15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-giving game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix H16, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H17]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H16, characterized in that the display is performed on the .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix H17 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix I1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341);
display restriction means (51) for restricting the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1, characterized in that

[Appendix I3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The game machine according to appendix I1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2 or supplementary note I3, not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix I4]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I3, wherein the period other than the specified period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I4, the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during the standby state period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and specify or guess the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining the specific information for the purpose.

[Appendix I5]
The display restricting means (51) restricts display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I4.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, other players take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and specify the specific numerical information based on the display history. Or it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for guessing.

[Appendix I6]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I5, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix I6, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix I6, characterized in that the display is made on the .

In the gaming machine according to Addendum I7, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

In addition, the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix J1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, at least the plurality of types are satisfied during a predetermined period of time from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. display control for displaying on display means (35, 39, 341) in a distinguishable manner a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information of means (51);
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in the first display order on the display means when a first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when a second specific condition is satisfied. Information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix J2]
The display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized in that:

[Appendix J3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The game machine according to appendix J1, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2 or appendix J3, the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix J4]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J3, characterized in that the game machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value is stored in the numerical information storage means. Including information stored. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J4, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof make it easier to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of the plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix J6]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period in accordance with a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J6, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. . By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
Supplementary note J7, characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game It is set to a special game that is transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of hits, so that the specific numerical information and, by extension, the predetermined numerical information can be guessed or specified for each first hit. At least one chance is guaranteed.

[Appendix J9]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7 or appendix J8, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J9, since the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, whether the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7 to J9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix J11]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R usually a jackpot) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is made with a higher probability than the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. 2nd special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to appendix J10, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11, the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in a single hit in which the first hit is shifted to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, if the first hit is a consecutive game that shifts to the second special game state, the second special game state is changed. When the special game to be executed does not complete the predetermined period and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the first special game state is executed. A predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game ending in the consecutive game. period will be longer. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher for a series of villas than for a single shot, and the more times that a series of villas is used, the more likely the number of times that a specific condition is met is higher. Become. As a result, the player not only obtains a higher expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtains a larger amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and can guess or predict the specific numerical information and, in turn, the predetermined numerical information. The benefit of being easier to identify can be obtained.

[Appendix J12]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10 or appendix J11, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix J12, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. It is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J12, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J13, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix J13, characterized in that the display is displayed on the

In the gaming machine according to appendix J14, when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix J14 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

[Appendix K1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
Indicates at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied. First display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
a second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45);
with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means ( 45), predetermined information is displayed. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to the player during a prescribed period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, the predetermined numerical value can be displayed to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. As a result, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical value information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2]
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that it is possible to

[Appendix K3]
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that it is possible to

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2 or supplementary note K3, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or the special information that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. . Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can specify the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix K4]
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K3, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. is displayed on the second display means provided in the Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a visible position when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the game machine according to appendix K5, the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. can be confirmed on the gaming hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6]
The second display control means (41)
Controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix K4 or appendix K5, wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed are selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed to the player by the second display means. can be reliably prevented from being grasped by

[Appendix K7]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K6, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate. For example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or a reverse order. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to judge high and low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8]
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix K7, characterized in that the display is displayed on the

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied for a number of times exceeding a specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

In addition, the gaming machine according to appendix K8 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. different from

10: Gaming Machine 31: Game Board 316: Variable Winning Port 341: Symbol Display Part 35: Lamp Display Part 351: First Individual Lamp Part 352: Second Individual Lamp Part 353: Third Individual Lamp Part 354: Fourth Individual Lamp Part 355: Fifth individual lamp part 356: Sixth individual lamp part 37: Creon device 373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention part 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display Part A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means ;
with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in one of a plurality of transition determination states with different transition rates for transitioning to the special game state,
storage means for storing each numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states ;
setting means for setting whether to perform the transition determination in the transition determination state using which of the numerical information;
display control means for displaying a display corresponding to one of the transition determination states set by the setting means in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display control means is
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
At least when a game ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. means for displaying a plurality of types of specific information displayed using numbers or characters corresponding to the specific numerical information in a predetermined area of the display means;
This game machine is
During the prescribed period, the prescribed information indicating the prescribed numerical information is not displayed in the prescribed area of the display means ,
The display order of the plurality of types of specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. is,
counting means for counting based on the number of game balls entering the specific area;
means for performing different numerical display control on the display means according to the counted number;
State switching means for switching between a predetermined valid state in which entry of a game ball into the specific area is valid and a predetermined invalid state in which entry of a game ball into the specific area is invalid;
with
During the predetermined effective state, it is configured to enable the entry of a plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area,
A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a display corresponding to the number of entered balls of a plurality of valid game balls entering said specific area during said predetermined valid state.

Images